diff options
| author | Manuel Pégourié-Gonnard <mpg@elzevir.fr> | 2008-06-21 16:05:24 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Manuel Pégourié-Gonnard <mpg@elzevir.fr> | 2008-06-21 16:05:24 +0000 |
| commit | 2591d5bab21119052bb58e82db7fd9fab8e97a7c (patch) | |
| tree | 7062a197de46919fef0fdc72a5320096d4cacc06 | |
| parent | 557142a18ecd2e95285292dc54e46edec842ecc2 (diff) | |
glossaries update 21jun08
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@8904 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
16 files changed, 2453 insertions, 1590 deletions
diff --git a/Master/bin/win32/makeglossaries.bat b/Master/bin/win32/makeglossaries.bat index fe949613d7c..d91f67bd3e9 100755 --- a/Master/bin/win32/makeglossaries.bat +++ b/Master/bin/win32/makeglossaries.bat @@ -1,8 +1,3 @@ -@echo off
-rem tl-w32-starter.bat
-rem universal script starter, batch file part
-rem this program calls the tl-w32-wrapper.texlua
-setlocal
-set ownpath=%~dp0%
-texlua "%ownpath%tl-w32-wrapper.texlua" "%~dpn0" %*
-endlocal
+@rem = '-*- Perl -*- +@echo off +perl -S "%~dp0makeglossaries" %* diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/CHANGES index c7b21c9e29c..df15408017a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/CHANGES +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/CHANGES @@ -1,5 +1,28 @@ glossaries change log: +v1.14 : + * Fixed bug in \glsnavhyperlink that causes an error when used + with hyperref and translator packages. + + * Added \glsautoprefix (specifies a prefix to the automatically + generated label) + + * Added nonumberlist and numberedsection keys to \printglossary + + * Changed \glsnavigation so that it only lists the groups that + are present. (This prevents unknown target warnings.) + + * Amended documentation. + +mfirstuc v1.02 (18 June 2008): + + * Fixed bug that transfered grouping, (e.g + \makefirstuc{\emph{abc}xyz} moved the xyz into the \emph) + + * If group following initial command is empty, \MakeUppercase + is applied to the command, e.g. \makefirstuc{\ae{}bc} now + produces \MakeUppercase\ae{}bc. + v1.13 : * Fixed bug in long4colheaderborder that puts an extra row at the end of the glossary. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README index 7a842dcdddf..3530e14c9c4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -LaTeX Package : glossaries v 1.12 +LaTeX Package : glossaries v 1.14 -Last Modified : 8 March 2008 +Last Modified : 17 June 2008 Author : Nicola Talbot @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ to the relevant glossary. The glossaries bundle also includes mfirstuc.sty which provides \makefirstuc{<stuff>} which makes the first object of <stuff> uppercase unless <stuff> starts with a control -sequence followed by a group, in which case the first +sequence followed by a non-empty group, in which case the first object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples: \makefirstuc{abc} -> Abc @@ -26,8 +26,7 @@ object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples: \makefirstuc{{\'a}bc} -> {\'A}bc \makefirstuc{\ae bc} -> \AE bc \makefirstuc{{\ae}bc} -> {\AE}bc - -(but don't do \makefirstuc{\ae{}bc} which produces \ae Bc.) + \makefirstuc{\ae{}bc} -> \AE{}bc INSTALLATION diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html index 2d75f7cafa5..d95128495a4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.html @@ -7,8 +7,8 @@ original version by: Nikos Drakos, CBLU, University of Leeds Jens Lippmann, Marek Rouchal, Martin Wilck and others --> <HTML> <HEAD> -<TITLE>glossaries.sty v 1.13: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</TITLE> -<META NAME="description" CONTENT="glossaries.sty v 1.13: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries"> +<TITLE>glossaries.sty v 1.14: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</TITLE> +<META NAME="description" CONTENT="glossaries.sty v 1.14: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries"> <META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="glossaries-manual"> <META NAME="resource-type" CONTENT="document"> <META NAME="distribution" CONTENT="global"> @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ original version by: Nikos Drakos, CBLU, University of Leeds <P> - <H1 ALIGN="CENTER">glossaries.sty v 1.13: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</H1> + <H1 ALIGN="CENTER">glossaries.sty v 1.14: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</H1> <P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>Nicola L.C. Talbot <BR> <BR> @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Norwich. Norfolk NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom. <BR><TT><A NAME="tex2html1" HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/</A></TT></STRONG></P> -<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>12th May 2008</STRONG></P> +<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>18th June 2008</STRONG></P> <BR> <H2><A NAME="SECTION00010000000000000000"> @@ -49,49 +49,49 @@ Contents</A> <!--Table of Contents--> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html44" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html46" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00020000000000000000">Introduction</A> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html45" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html47" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00021000000000000000">Multi-Lingual Support</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html46" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html48" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00022000000000000000">Generating the associated glossary files</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html47" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html49" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00023000000000000000">Troubleshooting</A> </UL> <BR> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html48" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html50" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00030000000000000000">A Quick Guide For The Impatient</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html49" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html51" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00040000000000000000">Overview</A> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html50" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html52" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00041000000000000000">Package Options</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html51" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html53" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00042000000000000000">Defining Glossary Entries</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html52" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html54" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00043000000000000000">Number lists</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html53" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html55" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00044000000000000000">Links to Glossary Entries</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html54" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html56" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00045000000000000000">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html55" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html57" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00046000000000000000">Displaying a glossary</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html56" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html58" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00047000000000000000">Defining New Glossaries</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html57" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html59" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00048000000000000000">Acronyms</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html58" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html60" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00049000000000000000">Unsetting and resetting entry flags</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html59" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html61" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000410000000000000000">Glossary Styles</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html60" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html62" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000411000000000000000">Defining your own glossary style</A> </UL> <BR> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html61" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html63" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00050000000000000000">Mfirstuc Package</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html62" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html64" HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00060000000000000000">Index</A> </UL> <!--End of Table of Contents--> @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ It also supports acronyms and glossary styles that include symbols (in addition to a name and description) for glossary entries. There is provision for loading a database of glossary terms where only those terms used in the text are added to the glossary. -This package replaces the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="2194"></A> package which is now +This package replaces the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="2316"></A> package which is now obsolete. <P> @@ -127,8 +127,10 @@ package. <P> -<H2><A NAME="SECTION00021000000000000000"> -Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00021000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:languages"></A> +<BR> +Multi-Lingual Support </H2> <P> @@ -136,14 +138,22 @@ As from version 1.08, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package now has limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent me the relevant translations either via email or via <TT>comp.text.tex</TT>. -However you must load <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2203"></A> <I>before</I> -<TT>glossaries</TT> to enable this. Note that if <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2207"></A> is loaded -and the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2210"></A> package is detected on T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X's path, then the -<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2213"></A> package will be loaded automatically. +However you must load <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2325"></A> <I>before</I> +<TT>glossaries</TT> to enable this. Note that if <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2329"></A> is loaded +and the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2332"></A> package is detected on T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X's path, then the +<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2335"></A> package will be loaded automatically, however, +it may not pick up on the required languages, so if the predefined +text is not translated, you may need to explicitly load the +<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2338"></A> package with the required languages. For example: +<PRE> +\usepackage[spanish]{babel} +\usepackage[spanish]{translator} +\usepackage{glossaries} +</PRE> <P> -If you want to use <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="2216"></A> or <TT>german</TT><A NAME="2219"></A> instead -of <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2222"></A>, you will need to include the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2225"></A> package +If you want to use <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="2341"></A> or <TT>german</TT><A NAME="2344"></A> instead +of <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2347"></A>, you will need to include the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2350"></A> package to provide the translations. For example: <PRE> \documentclass[ngerman]{article} @@ -191,7 +201,7 @@ The following languages are currently supported: </TR> </TABLE> </DIV> -The language dependent commands and <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2228"></A> keys used by the +The language dependent commands and <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2353"></A> keys used by the glossaries package are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:predefinednames">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:predefinednames">1</A>. <P> @@ -200,7 +210,7 @@ glossaries package are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:predefinedn <A NAME="tab:predefinednames"></A> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="203"></A> +<A NAME="225"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 1:</STRONG> Customised Text</CAPTION> @@ -208,41 +218,41 @@ Customised Text</CAPTION> <TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Translator key word </B></TH> <TH ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200><B>What it's for</B></TH> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glossaryname</TT><A NAME="2234"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glossaryname</TT><A NAME="2359"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Glossary</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Title of the main glossary.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acronymname</TT><A NAME="2237"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acronymname</TT><A NAME="2362"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Acronyms</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Title of the list of acronyms -(when used with package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2245"></A>).</TD> +(when used with package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2370"></A>).</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\entryname</TT><A NAME="2249"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\entryname</TT><A NAME="2374"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Notation (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for first column in glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries that support headers).</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\descriptionname</TT><A NAME="2252"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\descriptionname</TT><A NAME="2377"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Description (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for second column in glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries that support headers).</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\symbolname</TT><A NAME="2255"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\symbolname</TT><A NAME="2380"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Symbol (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for symbol column in glossary for glossary styles that support this option.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\pagelistname</TT><A NAME="2258"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\pagelistname</TT><A NAME="2383"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Page List (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for page list column in glossary for glossaries that support this option.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT><A NAME="2261"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT><A NAME="2386"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Symbols (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for symbols section of the glossary for glossary styles that support this option.</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT><A NAME="2264"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT><A NAME="2389"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Numbers (glossaries)</TT></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for numbers section of the glossary for glossary styles that support @@ -256,13 +266,13 @@ this option.</TD> <P> Due to the varied nature of glossaries, it's likely that the predefined translations may not be appropriate. If you are using -the <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2267"></A> package and do not have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2270"></A> package +the <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2392"></A> package and do not have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2395"></A> package installed, you need to be familiar with the advice on <A NAME="tex2html4" HREF="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=latexwords">changing the words babel uses</A>. <P> -If you have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2273"></A> package installed, then it becomes +If you have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2398"></A> package installed, then it becomes much easier to change the default translations. For example, if you are writing in Irish and you want <TT>\symbolname</TT> to produce "Siombail" instead of "Comhartha", then you can put the following @@ -281,9 +291,9 @@ Generating the associated glossary files <P> The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with the Perl script -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2277"></A> which will run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2280"></A> on -all the glossary files using a customized <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2283"></A> -<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="2286"></A> style file (which is created by <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2288"></A>). +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2402"></A> which will run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2405"></A> on +all the glossary files using a customized <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2408"></A> +<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="2411"></A> style file (which is created by <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2413"></A>). The relevant extensions are obtained from the auxiliary file, so you should only pass the basename as the argument. For example, if your document is called @@ -293,7 +303,7 @@ latex myfile makeglossaries myfile latex myfile </PRE> -You may need to explicitly load <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2291"></A> into +You may need to explicitly load <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2416"></A> into Perl: <PRE> perl makeglossaries myfile @@ -304,8 +314,8 @@ be able to use it. <P> If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to run -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2294"></A> for each glossary type you have defined. -For example, if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2302"></A> package option +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2419"></A> for each glossary type you have defined. +For example, if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2427"></A> package option then you will have both a main glossary as well as a list of acronyms, so you will need to do (assuming your document is called <TT>myfile.tex</TT>): <PRE> @@ -314,14 +324,14 @@ makeindex -s myfile.ist -t myfile.alg -o myfile.acr myfile.acn </PRE> This requires remembering all extensions for each of the glossaries defined in your document, so where possible you should use -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2306"></A> instead to reduce the possibility of error. +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2431"></A> instead to reduce the possibility of error. Don't pass all the glossary files in a single call to -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2309"></A> or it will merge all your glossaries into a +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2434"></A> or it will merge all your glossaries into a single glossary. <P> If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files -(e.g. <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="2312"></A> or <TT>.alg</TT><A NAME="2314"></A>) for messages. +(e.g. <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="2437"></A> or <TT>.alg</TT><A NAME="2439"></A>) for messages. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -334,16 +344,139 @@ Troubleshooting</A> <P> The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with a minimal file called <TT>minimalgls.tex</TT> which can be used for testing. This -should be located in <TT>texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/</TT>. Further -information on debugging LaTeX code is available at +should be located in <TT>texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/</TT>. +Further information on debugging LaTeX code is available at <TT><A NAME="tex2html5" HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/</A></TT>. <P> -There is a list of frequently asked questions for the -<TT>glossaries</TT> package available at +Below is a list of the most frequently asked questions. For +other queries, consult the <TT>glossaries</TT> FAQ at <TT><A NAME="tex2html6" - HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html</A></TT>. + HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html</A></TT>. + +<P> + +<OL> +<LI>I've used the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="2451"></A> option, but the acronyms +are displayed in normal sized upper case letters. + +<P> +The <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="2460"></A> package option uses <TT>\textsc</TT> to typeset +the acronyms. This command converts lower case letters to small +capitals, while upper case letters remain their usual size. Therefore +you need to specify the acronym in lower case letters. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in? + +<P> +The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="2469"></A> package +option and redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use the required typesetting +command. For example, suppose you would like the acronyms displayed in +a sans-serif font, then you can do: +<PRE> +\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in +on first use? + +<P> +The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="2478"></A> package +option and redefine <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> to use the required +command. Note that if you don't want the acronym on subsequent use +to use <TT>\smaller</TT>, you will also need to redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT>, +as above. For example to make the acronym emphasized on first use, +but use the surrounding font for subsequent use, you can do: +<PRE> +\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +\renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} +\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{#1} +</PRE> + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>I don't have Perl installed, do I have to use +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2482"></A>? + +<P> +Read <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">the previous +section</A>. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>I'm used to using the <TT>glossary</TT> package: are there any +instructions on migrating from the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="2486"></A> package to the +<TT>glossaries</TT> package? + +<P> +Read <A NAME="tex2html7" + HREF="glossary2glossaries.html">Upgrading +from the glossary package to the glossaries +package</A> which should be available from the +same location as this document. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>I'm using <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="2490"></A> but the fixed names haven't been +translated. + +<P> +The <TT>glossaries</TT> package currently only supports the following +languages: Danish, Dutch, English, French, German, Irish, Italian, +Hungarian, Polish and Spanish. If you want to add another language, +send me the translations, and I'll add them to the next version. + +<P> +If you are using one of the above languages, but the text hasn't been +translated, try adding the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="2494"></A> package with the +required languages explicitly (before you load the <TT>glossaries</TT> +package). For example: +<PRE> +\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} +\usepackage[ngerman]{translator} +\usepackage{glossaries} +</PRE> +Alternatively, you may be able to add the language as a global option +to the class file. Check the <TT>translator</TT> package documentation for +further details. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>My glossaries haven't appeared. + +<P> +Remember to do the following: + +<UL> +<LI>Add <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2499"></A> to the document preamble. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Use either <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="2502"></A> for each glossary that has +been defined or <TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="2505"></A>. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2508"></A>, <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="2511"></A>, <TT>\GLS</TT><A NAME="2514"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2517"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="2520"></A>, +<TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="2523"></A>, <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2526"></A>, <TT>\glsadd</TT><A NAME="2529"></A> or <TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="2532"></A> in the +document. + +<P> +</LI> +<LI>Run LaTeX on your document, then run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2535"></A>, +then run LaTeX on your document again. If you want the glossaries +to appear in the table of contents, you will need an extra LaTeX run. +</LI> +</UL> +</LI> +</OL> + <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -364,12 +497,12 @@ for additional commands and advice not listed here. <P> <OL> -<LI>Load <TT>glossaries</TT> <I>after</I> <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="2325"></A>: +<LI>Load <TT>glossaries</TT> <I>after</I> <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="2542"></A>: <PRE> \usepackage{hyperref} \usepackage{glossaries} </PRE> -Similarly for the <TT>html</TT><A NAME="2328"></A> package: +Similarly for the <TT>html</TT><A NAME="2545"></A> package: <PRE> \usepackage{html} \usepackage{glossaries} @@ -377,19 +510,19 @@ Similarly for the <TT>html</TT><A NAME="2328"></A> package: <P> </LI> -<LI>Always use <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2331"></A> if you want the glossary +<LI>Always use <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2548"></A> if you want the glossary entries to be written to the glossary file: <PRE> \documentclass{article} \usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries </PRE> -If you don't use <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2334"></A>, your glossaries will +If you don't use <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2551"></A>, your glossaries will not appear in the document! <P> </LI> -<LI>Use <TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="2337"></A> to make your glossaries appear +<LI>Use <TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="2554"></A> to make your glossaries appear in the document at that point. For example: <PRE> \maketitle @@ -402,13 +535,13 @@ document text will appear in the glossary. <P> </LI> <LI>When you have created your document, run LaTeX on it, -then the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2340"></A>, then run LaTeX on it again: +then the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2557"></A>, then run LaTeX on it again: <PRE> latex myfile makeglossaries myfile latex myfile </PRE> -(You may need to run LaTeX again if you have used the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2348"></A> +(You may need to run LaTeX again if you have used the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2565"></A> package option.) If you use Windows, there is a batch file called <TT>makeglossaries.bat</TT> which you can use, but you will @@ -418,23 +551,23 @@ still need Perl installed. </LI> <LI>New glossaries can be defined using: <P> -<TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="2352"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>log-ext</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>in-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>out-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>title</EM><TT>}</TT> +<TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="2569"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>log-ext</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>in-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>out-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>title</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> where <I>label</I> is an identifying label, <I>in-ext</I> is the extension of the file to be created -by <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2355"></A> (called by <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2358"></A>), +by <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2572"></A> (called by <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2575"></A>), <I>out-ext</I> is the extension of the file to be read by -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2361"></A> and <I>title</I> is the title for this +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2578"></A> and <I>title</I> is the title for this new glossary. The first optional argument <I>log-ext</I> specifies -the extension of the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2364"></A> transcript file. Example: +the extension of the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2581"></A> transcript file. Example: <PRE> \newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation} </PRE> This glossary's label is <TT>notation</TT> and its title -will be Notation. If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2367"></A>, the -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2370"></A> transcript will be written to a file with the -extension <TT>.nlg</TT><A NAME="2373"></A>. If <I>log-ext</I> is omitted, the extension -<TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="2375"></A> will be used. +will be Notation. If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2584"></A>, the +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2587"></A> transcript will be written to a file with the +extension <TT>.nlg</TT><A NAME="2590"></A>. If <I>log-ext</I> is omitted, the extension +<TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="2592"></A> will be used. <P> </LI> @@ -449,7 +582,7 @@ extension <TT>.nlg</TT><A NAME="2373"></A>. If <I>log-ext</I> is omitted, the ex <P> </LI> -<LI>If you use the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2382"></A> package option, the +<LI>If you use the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2599"></A> package option, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package will automatically create a new glossary type labelled <TT>acronym</TT>: @@ -460,8 +593,8 @@ will automatically create a new glossary type labelled <P> </LI> <LI>If your pages have a hyphen compositor (i.e. your page -numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine <TT>\glscompositor</TT><A NAME="2387"></A> -<I>before</I> <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2390"></A>: +numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine <TT>\glscompositor</TT><A NAME="2604"></A> +<I>before</I> <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2607"></A>: <PRE> \documentclass{article} \usepackage{glossaries} @@ -472,7 +605,7 @@ numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine <TT>\glscompositor</TT><A NAME="23 <P> </LI> <LI>To add the glossaries to the table of contents use the -<TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2398"></A> package option: +<TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2615"></A> package option: <PRE> \usepackage[toc]{glossaries} </PRE> @@ -481,10 +614,10 @@ numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine <TT>\glscompositor</TT><A NAME="23 </LI> <LI>Define a new entry with: <P> -<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="2402"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>}</TT> +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="2619"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> -The <I>key-val list</I> must at least contain a <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2405"></A> -key and a <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2408"></A> key. +The <I>key-val list</I> must at least contain a <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2622"></A> +key and a <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2625"></A> key. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{perl}{name=Perl, @@ -498,7 +631,7 @@ to use to identify it. </LI> <LI>If the entry name starts with an accented letter, you will need to group the first letter (otherwise it will cause a -problem for <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="2411"></A> and <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="2414"></A>): +problem for <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="2628"></A> and <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="2631"></A>): <PRE> \newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, description={select group or class}} @@ -512,7 +645,7 @@ description={canal from mouth to stomach}} <P> </LI> -<LI>If you have multiple glossaries, use the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="2417"></A> +<LI>If you have multiple glossaries, use the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="2634"></A> key to specify in which glossary the entry belongs. For example: <PRE> \newglossary{languages}{lan}{lng}{Index of Languages} @@ -523,7 +656,7 @@ key to specify in which glossary the entry belongs. For example: description=A scripting language, type=languages} </PRE> -If <TT>type</TT><A NAME="2420"></A> is omitted, the default glossary is used. +If <TT>type</TT><A NAME="2637"></A> is omitted, the default glossary is used. <P> </LI> @@ -539,7 +672,7 @@ description={A list of individual pages or page ranges </LI> <LI>Plural forms are assumed to be the singular form with an "s" appended, unless otherwise specified. To specify an -irregular plural, use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2423"></A> key. For example: +irregular plural, use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2640"></A> key. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=matrix, description=rectangular array of quantities, @@ -579,7 +712,7 @@ and subsequently appears as "SM" or "SMs". </LI> <LI>The quick and easy way to define an acronym is to use: <P> -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2426"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrev</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2643"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrev</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> <P> For example: <PRE> @@ -595,30 +728,30 @@ first={support vector machine (SVM)}, plural={SVMs}, firstplural={support vector machines (SVMs)}} </PRE> -(The value of <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="2429"></A> varies depending on whether -the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2437"></A> package option is used or not. +(The value of <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="2646"></A> varies depending on whether +the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2654"></A> package option is used or not. The optional argument <I>key-val list</I> can be used to -override any of the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="2441"></A> keys; for +override any of the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="2658"></A> keys; for example, if the acronym has an irregular plural.) <P> </LI> <LI>The font used to display the entry name in the glossary -is governed by <TT>\glsnamefont</TT><A NAME="2444"></A>. This can be redefined +is governed by <TT>\glsnamefont</TT><A NAME="2661"></A>. This can be redefined as required. For example, to make the entry names appear in a medium sans-serif font do: <PRE> \renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsf{\mdseries #1}} </PRE> Note that the list-like glossary styles defined in the -<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="2447"></A> package place the entry name in -the optional argument to <TT>\item</TT><A NAME="2450"></A>, so they will -appear in bold, unless you redefine <TT>\glsnamefont</TT><A NAME="2453"></A> to counteract the +<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="2664"></A> package place the entry name in +the optional argument to <TT>\item</TT><A NAME="2667"></A>, so they will +appear in bold, unless you redefine <TT>\glsnamefont</TT><A NAME="2670"></A> to counteract the bold font. <P> </LI> -<LI>In the document use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2456"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> +<LI>In the document use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2673"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> to use a predefined term (this will also enter the term into the associated glossary output file). For example: <PRE> @@ -630,21 +763,21 @@ A \gls{singmtx} is a matrix with a zero determinant. <LI>Other variations: <UL> -<LI><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="2459"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : like <TT>\gls</TT>, +<LI><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="2676"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : like <TT>\gls</TT>, but with first letter in upper case </LI> -<LI><TT>\GLS</TT><A NAME="2462"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : like <TT>\gls</TT>, +<LI><TT>\GLS</TT><A NAME="2679"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : like <TT>\gls</TT>, but all upper case. </LI> -<LI><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2465"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural +<LI><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2682"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural </LI> -<LI><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="2468"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural with +<LI><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="2685"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural with first letter in upper case </LI> -<LI><TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="2471"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural but +<LI><TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="2688"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> : use plural but all upper case </LI> -<LI><TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2474"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>link text</EM><TT>}</TT> : +<LI><TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2691"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>link text</EM><TT>}</TT> : use <I>link text</I> to link to the given entry in the glossary. </LI> </UL> @@ -665,8 +798,8 @@ The \gls{singmtx}['s] dimensions \ldots <P> </LI> <LI>The format of the associated entry number can be -changed using the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2477"></A> key in the optional argument. -Note that the value of the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2480"></A> key should be the +changed using the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2694"></A> key in the optional argument. +Note that the value of the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2697"></A> key should be the name of a command <I>without</I> the initial backslash. For example: <PRE> @@ -682,23 +815,23 @@ it will no longer have a hyperlink (if hyperlinks are enabled.) change the font whilst ensuring that the number remains a hyperlink. These are of the form <TT>\hyper</TT><I>xx</I> and are equivalent to the standard font changing commands of the -form <TT>\text</TT><I>xx</I>, as well as <TT>\hyperemph</TT><A NAME="2484"></A> -(which uses <TT>\emph</TT><A NAME="2487"></A>.) For example: +form <TT>\text</TT><I>xx</I>, as well as <TT>\hyperemph</TT><A NAME="2701"></A> +(which uses <TT>\emph</TT><A NAME="2704"></A>.) For example: <PRE> The primary definition of \glspl[format=hyperbf]{singmtx}. </PRE> <P> </LI> -<LI>Don't use declarations in <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2490"></A> as this can +<LI>Don't use declarations in <TT>format</TT><A NAME="2707"></A> as this can cause unpredictable results, as there is no guarantee that the effect will be localised to the required text. <P> </LI> <LI>Entries can be added to the glossary without producing -any text using <TT>\glsadd</TT><A NAME="2493"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> or -<TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="2496"></A>. These commands also taken an optional +any text using <TT>\glsadd</TT><A NAME="2710"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> or +<TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="2713"></A>. These commands also take an optional argument where you can specify the format. For example <PRE> \glsadd[format=hyperbf]{singmtx} @@ -711,8 +844,8 @@ any text where the command occurs. </LI> <LI>A number range can be entered using <code>format=(</code> and <code>format=)</code> to mark the beginning and ending of the -range<A NAME="tex2html7" - HREF="#foot446"><SUP>1</SUP></A>. For example: +range<A NAME="tex2html8" + HREF="#foot515"><SUP>1</SUP></A>. For example: <PRE> \glsadd[format=(]{singmtx} This is a very long section all about \glspl{singmtx}. @@ -721,7 +854,7 @@ range<A NAME="tex2html7" \glsadd[format=)]{singmtx} </PRE> -This is equivalent to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2499"></A>'s <code>|(</code> and <code>|)</code> +This is equivalent to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2716"></A>'s <code>|(</code> and <code>|)</code> formats. <P> @@ -743,13 +876,13 @@ formats. <LI>Only those terms that have actually been used in the document will be placed in the glossary. If you have defined a term that doesn't appear in the document, then it means -you haven't used it in the text (either via <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2502"></A> -or <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2505"></A> and related commands, or via <TT>\glsadd</TT><A NAME="2508"></A> -or <TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="2511"></A>.) +you haven't used it in the text (either via <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="2719"></A> +or <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2722"></A> and related commands, or via <TT>\glsadd</TT><A NAME="2725"></A> +or <TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="2728"></A>.) <P> </LI> -<LI>To change the sorting order, use the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="2514"></A> key. +<LI>To change the sorting order, use the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="2731"></A> key. For example: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{universal}{name={\ensuremath{\mathcal{U}}}, @@ -759,7 +892,7 @@ sort=U} <P> </LI> -<LI>You don't need to escape <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2517"></A>'s special characters: +<LI>You don't need to escape <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2734"></A>'s special characters: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{quote}{name={"}, description={Double quote character}} @@ -781,21 +914,21 @@ description={A metric measurement of length}, symbol={m}} </PRE> The predefined glossary styles that display the entry symbol -are: <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="2520"></A>, <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="2522"></A>, -<TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="2524"></A>, <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="2526"></A>, -<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="2528"></A>, <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="2530"></A>, -<TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="2532"></A> and <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="2534"></A>. +are: <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="2737"></A>, <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="2739"></A>, +<TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="2741"></A>, <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="2743"></A>, +<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="2745"></A>, <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="2747"></A>, +<TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="2749"></A> and <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="2751"></A>. All the other styles supplied by this package ignore the associated symbol. <P> </LI> -<LI>Glossary styles can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="2541"></A> +<LI>Glossary styles can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="2758"></A> package option. For example: <PRE> \usepackage[style=long3col]{glossaries} </PRE> -or using <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="2545"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. For example: +or using <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="2762"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. For example: <PRE> \glossarystyle{altlist} </PRE> @@ -805,7 +938,7 @@ bundle are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:styles">Glossary Styles <P> </LI> <LI>The list of numbers associated with each glossary entry -can be suppressed using the package option <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2554"></A>: +can be suppressed using the package option <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2771"></A>: <PRE> \usepackage[nonumberlist]{glossaries} </PRE> @@ -814,14 +947,14 @@ can be suppressed using the package option <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2554">< </LI> <LI>By default, the glossaries will appear in an unnumbered chapter if chapters are defined, otherwise in an unnumbered -section. This can be changed using the <TT>section</TT><A NAME="2563"></A> package +section. This can be changed using the <TT>section</TT><A NAME="2780"></A> package option. For example, to make the glossaries appear in an unnumbered section, even if chapters are defined, do: <PRE> \usepackage[section]{glossaries} </PRE> Other sectional units can also be specified as -<TT>section</TT><A NAME="2572"></A>=<I>value</I>. For example, to make the glossaries +<TT>section</TT><A NAME="2789"></A>=<I>value</I>. For example, to make the glossaries appear in unnumbered subsections: <PRE> \usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries} @@ -842,35 +975,37 @@ Overview <P> -<H2><A NAME="SECTION00041000000000000000"> -Package Options</A> +<H2><A NAME="SECTION00041000000000000000"></A> +<A NAME="sec:pkgopts"></A> +<BR> +Package Options </H2> <P> The <TT>glossaries</TT> package options are as follows: <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2585"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2802"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>Add the glossaries to the table of contents. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="2594"></A></STRONG></DT> -<DD>When used with <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2603"></A>, this will +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="2811"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>When used with <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2820"></A>, this will add <TT>\numberline</TT><code>{}</code> in the final argument of <TT>\addcontentsline</TT>. This will align the table of contents entry with the numbered section titles. Note that this option has no -effect if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2612"></A> option is omitted. If <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2621"></A> is -used without <TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="2630"></A>, the title will be aligned with +effect if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2829"></A> option is omitted. If <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="2838"></A> is +used without <TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="2847"></A>, the title will be aligned with the section numbers rather than the section titles. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2639"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2856"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>Make a separate glossary for acronyms. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>section</TT><A NAME="2648"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>section</TT><A NAME="2865"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its value should be the name of a sectional unit (e.g. chapter). This will make the glossaries appear in the named sectional unit, @@ -888,22 +1023,22 @@ is equivalent to \usepackage[section=section]{glossaries} </PRE> You can change this value later in the document using -<TT>\setglossarysection</TT><A NAME="2652"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>}</TT>. +<TT>\setglossarysection</TT><A NAME="2869"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>}</TT>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="2660"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="2877"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The glossaries are placed in unnumbered sectional units by default, -but this can be changed using <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="2669"></A>. This option can take -three possible values: <TT>false</TT><A NAME="2673"></A> (no -number, i.e. use starred form), <TT>nolabel</TT><A NAME="2675"></A> +but this can be changed using <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="2886"></A>. This option can take +three possible values: <TT>false</TT><A NAME="2890"></A> (no +number, i.e. use starred form), <TT>nolabel</TT><A NAME="2892"></A> (numbered, i.e. unstarred form, but not labelled) and -<TT>autolabel</TT><A NAME="2677"></A> (numbered with automatic -labelling). If <TT>numberedsection=autolabel</TT><A NAME="2686"></A> is used, each +<TT>autolabel</TT><A NAME="2894"></A> (numbered with automatic +labelling). If <TT>numberedsection=autolabel</TT><A NAME="2903"></A> is used, each glossary is given a label that matches the glossary type, so the main (default) glossary is labelled <TT>main</TT>, the list of -acronyms is labelled <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="tex2html8" - HREF="#foot2039"><SUP>2</SUP></A> and additional glossaries are labelled +acronyms is labelled <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="tex2html9" + HREF="#foot2159"><SUP>2</SUP></A> and additional glossaries are labelled using the value specified in the first mandatory argument to <TT>\newglossary</TT>. For example, if you load <TT>glossaries</TT> using: @@ -918,102 +1053,119 @@ acronyms is in section~\ref{acronym}. </PRE> If you can't decide whether to have the acronyms in the main glossary or a separate list of acronyms, you can use -<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="2698"></A> which is set to <TT>main</TT> if the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2706"></A> option is not used and is set to <TT>acronym</TT> -if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2715"></A> option is used. For example: +<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="2915"></A> which is set to <TT>main</TT> if the +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2923"></A> option is not used and is set to <TT>acronym</TT> +if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2932"></A> option is used. For example: <PRE> The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}. </PRE> <P> +As from version 1.14, you can add a prefix to the label by +redefining <TT>\glsautoprefix</TT>. +For example: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{glo:} +</PRE> +will add <TT>glo:</TT> to the automatically generated label, so +you can then, for example, refer to the list of acronyms as follows: +<PRE> +The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{glo:\acronymtype}. +</PRE> +Or, if you are undecided on a prefix: +<PRE> +The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\glsautoprefix\acronymtype}. +</PRE> + +<P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="2724"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="2941"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined glossary styles are listed <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:styles">later</A>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2733"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="2950"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option will suppress the -associated number lists<A NAME="2736"></A> in the glossaries (see also +associated number lists<A NAME="2953"></A> in the glossaries (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>.) <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="2743"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="2960"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. The value should be the name of the default counter to use in the number -lists<A NAME="2746"></A>. +lists<A NAME="2963"></A>. <P> <A NAME="sanitize"></A> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="2753"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="2970"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option whose value is also a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list. By default, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package sanitizes the values of the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="2758"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2761"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2764"></A> keys used +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="2975"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2978"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2981"></A> keys used when defining a new glossary entry. This may lead to unexpected results if you try to display these values within the document text. This -sanitization can be switched off using the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="2772"></A> package +sanitization can be switched off using the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="2989"></A> package option. For example, to switch off the sanitization for the -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2776"></A> and <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2779"></A> keys, but not for the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2782"></A> key, do: +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2993"></A> and <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2996"></A> keys, but not for the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2999"></A> key, do: <PRE> \usepackage[sanitize={name=false,description=false,% symbol=true}]{glossaries} </PRE> <P> -<B>Note</B>: this sanitization only applies to the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2785"></A>, -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2788"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="2791"></A> keys. It doesn't apply -to any of the other keys (except the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="2794"></A> key which is +<B>Note</B>: this sanitization only applies to the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3002"></A>, +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="3005"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3008"></A> keys. It doesn't apply +to any of the other keys (except the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="3011"></A> key which is always sanitized) so fragile commands contained in the value of the other keys must always be protected using <TT>\protect</TT>. -Since the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2797"></A> key is obtained from the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="2800"></A> key, you will still need to protect fragile commands -in the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2803"></A> key if you don't use the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2806"></A> key. +Since the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3014"></A> key is obtained from the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3017"></A> key, you will still need to protect fragile commands +in the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3020"></A> key if you don't use the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3023"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2814"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3031"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2818"></A> to allow a description. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3035"></A> to allow a description. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="2826"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3043"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2830"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3047"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="2838"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3055"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2842"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3059"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="2850"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3067"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2854"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3071"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="2862"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3079"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option changes the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="2866"></A> so that acronyms are always expanded. +<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3083"></A> so that acronyms are always expanded. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> for further details. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="2874"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="3091"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This option provides shortcut commands for acronyms. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A> @@ -1035,24 +1187,24 @@ Defining Glossary Entries <P> All glossary entries must be defined before they are used, so it -is better to define them in the preamble to ensure this.<A NAME="tex2html9" - HREF="#foot2059"><SUP>3</SUP></A> However +is better to define them in the preamble to ensure this.<A NAME="tex2html10" + HREF="#foot2179"><SUP>3</SUP></A> However only those entries that occur in the document (using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A> and <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A>) will appear in the glossary. Each time an entry is used in this way, a line is added to an associated glossary -(<TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="2881"></A>) file, which then needs to be converted into a -corresponding <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="2883"></A> file which contains the typeset glossary -which is input by <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="2885"></A> or -<TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="2888"></A>. The Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="2891"></A> -can be used to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2894"></A>, using a customised -<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="2897"></A> style file, for each of the glossaries that are defined +(<TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="3098"></A>) file, which then needs to be converted into a +corresponding <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="3100"></A> file which contains the typeset glossary +which is input by <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="3102"></A> or +<TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="3105"></A>. The Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3108"></A> +can be used to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3111"></A>, using a customised +<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="3114"></A> style file, for each of the glossaries that are defined in the document. Note that there should be no need for you to explicitly edit or input any of these external files. <P> The command <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> must be placed in the preamble in -order to create the customised <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="2899"></A> <TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="2902"></A> +order to create the customised <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3116"></A> <TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="3119"></A> style file and to ensure that glossary entries are written to the appropriate output file. If you omit <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> none of the glossaries will be created. Note that if your page numbers use a @@ -1074,100 +1226,102 @@ The first argument, <I>label</I>, must be a unique label with which to identify this entry. The second argument, <I>key-val list</I>, is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list that supplies the relevant information -about this entry. There are two required fields: <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2904"></A> and -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="2907"></A>. Available fields are listed below: +about this entry. There are two required fields: <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3121"></A> and +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="3124"></A>. Available fields are listed below: <P> <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>name</TT><A NAME="2910"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>name</TT><A NAME="3127"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The name of the entry (as it will appear in the glossary). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="2913"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3130"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>A brief description of this term (to appear in the glossary). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="2916"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="3133"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The plural form of the -description (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="2919"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="2922"></A> -by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2925"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="2928"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="2931"></A>). If omitted, the value -is set to the same as the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="2934"></A> key. +description (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3136"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3139"></A> +by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="3142"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="3145"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="3148"></A>). If omitted, the value +is set to the same as the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3151"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>text</TT><A NAME="2937"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>text</TT><A NAME="3154"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How this entry will appear in the document text -when using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2940"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this -field is omitted, the value of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="2943"></A> key is used. +when using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3157"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this +field is omitted, the value of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3160"></A> key is used. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>first</TT><A NAME="2946"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>first</TT><A NAME="3163"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How the entry will appear in the document text -the first time it is used with <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="2949"></A> (or one of its uppercase -variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2952"></A> +the first time it is used with <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3166"></A> (or one of its uppercase +variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3169"></A> key is used. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2955"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3172"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How the entry will appear in the document text -when using <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2958"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). +when using <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="3175"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is obtained by appending -<TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="2961"></A> to the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="2964"></A> field. +<TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="3178"></A> to the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3181"></A> field. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2967"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3184"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>How the entry will appear in the -document text the first time it is used with <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="2970"></A> (or one of its +document text the first time it is used with <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="3187"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is obtained -from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2973"></A> key, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="2976"></A> key is omitted, -or by appending <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="2979"></A> to the value of the -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="2982"></A> field, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="2985"></A> field is present. +from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3190"></A> key, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3193"></A> key is omitted, +or by appending <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="3196"></A> to the value of the +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="3199"></A> field, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3202"></A> field is present. + +<P> <B>Note:</B> prior to version 1.13, the default value of -<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2988"></A> was always taken by appending "s" to the -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="2991"></A> key, which meant that you had to specify both -<TT>plural</TT><A NAME="2994"></A> and <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="2997"></A>, even if you hadn't -used the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3000"></A> key. +<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3205"></A> was always taken by appending "s" to the +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="3208"></A> key, which meant that you had to specify both +<TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3211"></A> and <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3214"></A>, even if you hadn't +used the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3217"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3003"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3220"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This field is provided to allow the user to specify an associated symbol, but most glossary styles ignore this value. If omitted, the value is set to <TT>\relax</TT>. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="3006"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="3223"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is the plural form of the -symbol (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3009"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3012"></A> -by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="3015"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="3018"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="3021"></A>). If omitted, the value -is set to the same as the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3024"></A> key. +symbol (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3226"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3229"></A> +by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="3232"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="3235"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="3238"></A>). If omitted, the value +is set to the same as the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3241"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>sort</TT><A NAME="3027"></A></STRONG></DT> -<DD>This value indicates how <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3030"></A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>sort</TT><A NAME="3244"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This value indicates how <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3247"></A> should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is given by the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3033"></A> field. This value is equivalent to -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3036"></A>'s "actual" character (which is usually the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3250"></A> field. This value is equivalent to +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3253"></A>'s "actual" character (which is usually the at-sign @ although the <TT>glossaries</TT> package uses a different symbol). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="3040"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="3257"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is the glossary type to which this entry belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed. The list of acronyms type is given by -<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="3043"></A> which will either be <TT>main</TT> or -<TT>acronym</TT>, depending on whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3051"></A> package +<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="3260"></A> which will either be <TT>main</TT> or +<TT>acronym</TT>, depending on whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3268"></A> package option was used. </DD> </DL> @@ -1178,24 +1332,6 @@ problem for commands like <TT>\Gls</TT> and <TT>\Glspl</TT>. For examp \newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, description={select group or class}} </PRE> -Similarly, commands such as <TT>\ae</TT> and <TT>\oe</TT> should either be placed -inside a group or followed by a space. For example: -<PRE> -\newglossaryentry{oesophagus}{% -name={{\oe}sophagus}, -description={canal from mouth to stomach}} -</PRE> -The following is also fine: -<PRE> -\newglossaryentry{oesophagus}{% -name={\oe sophagus}, -description={canal from mouth to stomach}} -</PRE> -but don't do <code>\oe{}sophagus</code> as it will confuse -<TT>\makefirstuc</TT><A NAME="3055"></A> (described -<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:mfirstuc">later</A>) -and will produce oeSophagus instead of -OEsophagus. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -1224,7 +1360,7 @@ description={a fully grown female of any bovine animal}} <P> If you are writing in a language that supports -multiple plurals (for a given term) then use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3061"></A> key +multiple plurals (for a given term) then use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3275"></A> key for one of them (typically the one you are most likely to use) and for the others you will need to explicitly write the plural form using <TT>\glslink</TT> rather than using <TT>\glspl</TT>. Returning to the cow @@ -1244,7 +1380,7 @@ by appending a different letter, or sequence of letters, you can redefine <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT> as required. However, this must be done <I>before</I> the entries are defined. For languages that don't form plurals by simply appending a suffix, all the plural forms must be -specified using the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3064"></A> key (and the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3067"></A> +specified using the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3278"></A> key (and the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3281"></A> key where necessary). <P> @@ -1270,7 +1406,7 @@ file, and use: where <I>filename</I> is the name of the file containing all the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> commands. The optional argument <I>type</I> is the name of the glossary to which those entries -should belong, for those entries where the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="3073"></A> key has +should belong, for those entries where the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="3287"></A> key has been omitted (or, more specifically, for those entries whose type has been specified by <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT>, which is what <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> uses by default). For example, suppose I have @@ -1311,9 +1447,9 @@ then (supposing I have defined a new glossary type called \loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms} </PRE> will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>acronym</TT>, if the -package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3081"></A> has been specified, or will add +package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3295"></A> has been specified, or will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>altacronym</TT>, if the -package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3090"></A> is not specified. In this instance, +package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3304"></A> is not specified. In this instance, it is better to change <TT>myacronyms.tex</TT> to: <PRE> \newacronym[type=\glsdefaulttype]{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} @@ -1323,7 +1459,7 @@ and now \loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms} </PRE> will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>altacronym</TT>, -regardless of whether or not the package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3099"></A> is +regardless of whether or not the package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3313"></A> is used. <P> @@ -1343,13 +1479,13 @@ Number lists </H2> <P> -Each entry in the glossary has an associated <I>number list</I><A NAME="3106"></A>. +Each entry in the glossary has an associated <I>number list</I><A NAME="3320"></A>. By default, these numbers refer to the pages on which that entry has been used (using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A> and <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A>). The number list can be suppressed using -the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="3113"></A> package option, or an alternative counter -can be set as the default using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="3122"></A> package option. +the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="3327"></A> package option, or an alternative counter +can be set as the default using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="3336"></A> package option. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -1363,16 +1499,16 @@ Links to Glossary Entries <P> Once you have defined a glossary entry using -<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="3129"></A>, you can refer to that entry in the +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="3343"></A>, you can refer to that entry in the document using one of the commands listed in this section. The text which appears at that point in the document when using one of these commands is referred to as the -<I>link text</I><A NAME="3132"></A> (even if there are no hyperlinks). +<I>link text</I><A NAME="3346"></A> (even if there are no hyperlinks). <P> -The way the link text<A NAME="3133"></A> is displayed +The way the link text<A NAME="3347"></A> is displayed depends on <TT>\glstextformat{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>. -For example, to make all link text<A NAME="3134"></A> appear in a sans-serif +For example, to make all link text<A NAME="3348"></A> appear in a sans-serif font, do: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{\textsf{#1}} @@ -1393,10 +1529,10 @@ any of the following keys: <P> <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>format</TT><A NAME="3136"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>format</TT><A NAME="3350"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies how to format the associated number for this entry in the glossary. This value is -equivalent to the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3139"></A> encap value, and (as with +equivalent to the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3353"></A> encap value, and (as with <TT>\index</TT>) the value needs to be the name of a command <I>without</I> the initial backslash. As with <TT>\index</TT>, the characters <code>(</code> and <code>)</code> can also be used to specify the beginning and ending of a @@ -1414,7 +1550,7 @@ and use that command. <P> If you are using hyperlinks and you want to change the font of the -hyperlink, don't use <TT>\hyperpage</TT> (provided by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="3142"></A> +hyperlink, don't use <TT>\hyperpage</TT> (provided by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="3356"></A> package) as the numbers may not refer to a page number. Instead, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides the following number formats: @@ -1473,19 +1609,19 @@ command called, say, <TT>\hyperbsf</TT>: <PRE> \newcommand{\hyperbsf}[1]{\textbf{\hypersf{#1}}} </PRE> -and then use <TT>hyperbsf</TT> as the value for the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="3146"></A> +and then use <TT>hyperbsf</TT> as the value for the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="3360"></A> key. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="3149"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="3363"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies which counter to use for the associated number for this glossary entry. (See also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>.) <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="3152"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="3366"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is a boolean key which can be used to enable/disable the hyperlink to the relevant entry in the glossary. (Note that setting <TT>hyper=true</TT> will have no @@ -1510,12 +1646,12 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\gls[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is the same as <TT>\glslink</TT>, except that the link text<A NAME="3154"></A> -is determined from the values of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3156"></A> and -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="3159"></A> keys supplied when the entry was defined using -<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="3162"></A>. If the entry has been marked as having -been used, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3165"></A> key will be used, otherwise -the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3168"></A> key will be used. +is the same as <TT>\glslink</TT>, except that the link text<A NAME="3368"></A> +is determined from the values of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3370"></A> and +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="3373"></A> keys supplied when the entry was defined using +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="3376"></A>. If the entry has been marked as having +been used, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3379"></A> key will be used, otherwise +the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3382"></A> key will be used. On completion, <TT>\gls</TT> will mark the entry given by <I>label</I> as used. @@ -1544,7 +1680,7 @@ can be changed (see <P> The first optional argument <I>options</I> is the same as the optional -argument to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="3171"></A>. As with <TT>\glslink</TT>, these commands also +argument to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="3385"></A>. As with <TT>\glslink</TT>, these commands also have a starred version that disable the hyperlink. <P> @@ -1560,8 +1696,8 @@ There are also analogous plural forms: <TT>\GLSpl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -These determine the link text from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3174"></A> and -<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3177"></A> keys supplied when the entry was first +These determine the link text from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3388"></A> and +<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3391"></A> keys supplied when the entry was first defined. As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable the hyperlink. @@ -1571,8 +1707,8 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glstext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3180"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3183"></A> key and does not mark the entry as +is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3394"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3397"></A> key and does not mark the entry as having been used. Unlike <TT>\gls</TT>, the inserted text <I>insert</I> is always appended to the link text. @@ -1595,8 +1731,8 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3186"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3189"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3400"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="3403"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. @@ -1619,8 +1755,8 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3192"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3195"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3406"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3409"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. @@ -1643,8 +1779,8 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3198"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3201"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3412"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3415"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. @@ -1667,13 +1803,13 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3204"></A> except that it always uses the value of the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3207"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3418"></A> except that it always uses the value of the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3421"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3210"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3424"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> -of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3213"></A> key and protect fragile commands. +of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="3427"></A> key and protect fragile commands. <P> There are also analogous commands: @@ -1694,13 +1830,13 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glssymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3216"></A> except that it always uses the value of the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3219"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3430"></A> except that it always uses the value of the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3433"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3222"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3436"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> -of the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3225"></A> key and protect fragile commands. +of the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3439"></A> key and protect fragile commands. <P> There are also analogous commands: @@ -1721,14 +1857,14 @@ The command: <BR><TT>\glsdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT> <BR> <BR> -is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3228"></A> except that it always uses the value -of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3231"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always +is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3442"></A> except that it always uses the value +of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3445"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having been used. Note: if you want to use this -command and the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3234"></A> key contains commands, you will +command and the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3448"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> -of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3237"></A> key and protect fragile commands. +of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3451"></A> key and protect fragile commands. <P> There are also analogous commands: @@ -1757,18 +1893,18 @@ Changing the format of the link text </H3> <P> -The format of the link text<A NAME="3242"></A> for <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3244"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="3247"></A> +The format of the link text<A NAME="3456"></A> for <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3458"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="3461"></A> and their uppercase variants is governed by two commands: <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT>, which is used the first time a glossary entry is used in the text and <TT>\glsdisplay</TT>, which is used subsequently. Both commands take four arguments: the first is either the singular or -plural form given by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3250"></A>, <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3253"></A>, -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="3256"></A> or <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3259"></A> keys (used when the term was +plural form given by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="3464"></A>, <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="3467"></A>, +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="3470"></A> or <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="3473"></A> keys (used when the term was defined) depending on context; the second argument is the term's -description (as supplied by the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3262"></A> key); the third +description (as supplied by the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3476"></A> key); the third argument is the symbol associated with the term (as supplied by the -<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3265"></A> key) and the fourth argument is the additional text +<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3479"></A> key) and the fourth argument is the additional text supplied in the final optional argument to <TT>\gls</TT> or <TT>\glspl</TT> (or their uppercase variants). The default definitions of <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> simply @@ -1777,7 +1913,7 @@ The remaining arguments are ignored. <P> For example, suppose you want a glossary of measurements and -units, you can use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3268"></A> key to store the unit: +units, you can use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3482"></A> key to store the unit: <PRE> \newglossaryentry{distance}{name=distance, description={The length between two points}, @@ -1797,8 +1933,8 @@ the two points" -- but in this instance it may be better not to use a contraction). <P> -Note also that all of the link text<A NAME="3270"></A> will be formatted according -to <TT>\glstextformat</TT><A NAME="3272"></A> (described earlier). So if you do, say: +Note also that all of the link text<A NAME="3484"></A> will be formatted according +to <TT>\glstextformat</TT><A NAME="3486"></A> (described earlier). So if you do, say: <PRE> \renewcommand{\glstextformat}[1]{\textbf{#1}} \renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)} @@ -1817,8 +1953,8 @@ of redefining <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT>. <P> Both <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT> take two arguments: -the first (which is optional) is the glossary's label<A NAME="tex2html10" - HREF="#foot2102"><SUP>4</SUP></A> and the second is how the term should be +the first (which is optional) is the glossary's label<A NAME="tex2html11" + HREF="#foot2218"><SUP>4</SUP></A> and the second is how the term should be displayed when it is invoked using commands <TT>\gls</TT>, <TT>\glspl</TT> and their uppercase variants. This is similar to the way <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> was redefined above. @@ -1844,10 +1980,10 @@ will be displayed as: "set (denoted <I>S</I>)" (similarly for <TT>\glspl</TT> and the uppercase variants). <P> -Remember that if you use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3279"></A> key, you need to use a +Remember that if you use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3493"></A> key, you need to use a glossary style that displays the symbol, as many of the styles ignore it. In addition, if you want either the description or symbol to appear -in the link text<A NAME="3281"></A>, you will have to disable the +in the link text<A NAME="3495"></A>, you will have to disable the <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A> of these keys and protect fragile commands. <P> @@ -1860,10 +1996,10 @@ Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries</A> </H3> <P> -If you load the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="3286"></A> or <TT>html</TT><A NAME="3289"></A> packages prior to -loading the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, commands such as <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="3293"></A> -and <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3296"></A>, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks -to the relevant glossary entry, unless the <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="3299"></A> +If you load the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="3500"></A> or <TT>html</TT><A NAME="3503"></A> packages prior to +loading the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, commands such as <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="3507"></A> +and <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="3510"></A>, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks +to the relevant glossary entry, unless the <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="3513"></A> option has been set to <TT>false</TT>. You can disable or enable links using: <BR> <BR><TT>\glsdisablehyper</TT> @@ -1876,8 +2012,8 @@ and <BR> respectively. The effect can be localised by placing the commands within a group. Note that you should only use <TT>\glsenablehyper</TT> -if the commands <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="3302"></A> and <TT>\hypertarget</TT><A NAME="3305"></A> have been -defined (for example, by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="3308"></A> package). +if the commands <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="3516"></A> and <TT>\hypertarget</TT><A NAME="3519"></A> have been +defined (for example, by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="3522"></A> package). <P> @@ -1894,8 +2030,8 @@ generating any text at that point in the document using: <BR><TT>\glsadd[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> -This is similar to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="3311"></A>, only it doesn't produce -any text (so therefore, there is no <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="3314"></A> key +This is similar to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="3525"></A>, only it doesn't produce +any text (so therefore, there is no <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="3528"></A> key available in <I>options</I> but all the other options that can be used with <TT>\glslink</TT> can be passed to <TT>\glsadd</TT>). For example, to add a page range to the glossary number list for the @@ -1913,7 +2049,7 @@ To add all entries that have been defined, use: <BR> <BR> The optional argument is the same as for <TT>\glsadd</TT>, except -there is also a key <TT>types</TT><A NAME="3317"></A> which can be +there is also a key <TT>types</TT><A NAME="3531"></A> which can be used to specify which glossaries to use. This should be a comma separated list. For example, if you only want to add all the entries belonging to the list of acronyms (specified by @@ -1937,12 +2073,12 @@ Displaying a glossary</A> The command <TT>\printglossaries</TT> will display all the glossaries in the order in which they were defined. Note that no glossaries will appear until -you have either used the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3323"></A> -or have directly used <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3326"></A> (as described in +you have either used the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3537"></A> +or have directly used <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3540"></A> (as described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the Associated Glossary Files</A>). If the glossary still does not appear after you re-LaTeX your document, check -the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3329"></A> log files to see if there is a problem. -Remember that you also need to use the command <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3332"></A> in +the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3543"></A> log files to see if there is a problem. +Remember that you also need to use the command <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3546"></A> in the preamble to enable the glossaries. <P> @@ -1954,7 +2090,7 @@ An individual glossary can be displayed using: where <I>options</I> is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list of options. The following keys are available: <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="3335"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="3549"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>The value of this key specifies which glossary to print. If omitted, the default glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms: @@ -1964,24 +2100,44 @@ glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms: <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>title</TT><A NAME="3338"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>title</TT><A NAME="3552"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is the glossary's title (overriding the title specified when the glossary was defined). <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>toctitle</TT><A NAME="3341"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>toctitle</TT><A NAME="3555"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This is the title -to use for the table of contents (if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="3349"></A> package +to use for the table of contents (if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="3563"></A> package option has been used). If omitted, the glossary title is used. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="3353"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="3567"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD>This specifies which glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect -of the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="3361"></A> option or <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="3365"></A>. +of the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="3575"></A> package option or <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="3579"></A>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="3582"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>This specifies +whether to use a numbered section for this glossary, overriding +the effect of the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="3590"></A> package option. This +key has the same syntax as the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="3599"></A> package +option, described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:pkgopts">earlier</A>. + +<P> +</DD> +<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="3603"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DD>Unlike the package option +of the same name, this key is a boolean key. If true (<code>nonumberlist=true</code>) the numberlist +is suppressed for this glossary. If false (<code>nonumberlist=false</code>) the numberlist is +displayed for this glossary. If no value is supplied, true is +assumed. + +<P> </DD> </DL> @@ -2068,10 +2224,10 @@ where <I>name</I> is the label to assign to this glossary. The arguments input and output files for that glossary, <I>title</I> is the default title for this new glossary and the final optional argument <I>counter</I> specifies which counter to use for the associated number -lists<A NAME="3373"></A> (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>). The +lists<A NAME="3611"></A> (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>). The first optional argument specifies the extension for the -<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3375"></A> transcript file (this information is only used by -<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3378"></A> which picks up the information from the +<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="3613"></A> transcript file (this information is only used by +<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="3616"></A> which picks up the information from the auxiliary file). <P> @@ -2080,15 +2236,15 @@ Note that the main (default) glossary is automatically created as: \newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname} </PRE> so it can be identified by the label <TT>main</TT>. Using the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3386"></A> package option is equivalent to: +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3624"></A> package option is equivalent to: <PRE> \newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname} </PRE> so it can be identified by the label <TT>acronym</TT>. If you are -not sure whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3395"></A> option has been used, you +not sure whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3633"></A> option has been used, you can identify the list of acronyms by the command <TT>\acronymtype</TT> which is set to -<TT>acronym</TT>, if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3404"></A> option has been used, +<TT>acronym</TT>, if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3642"></A> option has been used, otherwise it is set to <TT>main</TT>. <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -2132,16 +2288,16 @@ firstplural={</TT> <I>long</I><TT><TT>\glspluralsuffix\space</TT> <P> As mentioned in the previous section, the command <TT>\acronymtype</TT> is the name of the glossary in which the acronyms should appear. If the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3417"></A> package option has been used, this will be +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="3655"></A> package option has been used, this will be <TT>acronym</TT>, otherwise it will be <TT>main</TT>. The acronyms can then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary entry. <P> -(<B>Note:</B> since <TT>\newacronym</TT> sets <code>type=\acronymtype</code>, +<B>Note:</B> since <TT>\newacronym</TT> sets <code>type=\acronymtype</code>, if you want to load a file containing acronym definitions using <TT>\loadglsentries[</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>filename</EM><TT>}</TT>, the optional argument <I>type</I> will not have an effect unless you explicitly set the -type as <code>type=\glsdefaulttype</code>. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:loadglsentries">earlier</A> for details.) +type as <code>type=\glsdefaulttype</code>. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:loadglsentries">earlier</A> for details. <P> For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: @@ -2165,10 +2321,10 @@ first use and "IDN" on subsequent uses. This section describes acronyms that have been defined using <TT>\newacronym</TT>. If you prefer to define all your acronyms using <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> explicitly, then you should skip this section -and ignore the package options: <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3426"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3435"></A>, -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="3444"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3453"></A>, <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3462"></A> and -<TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="3471"></A>, as these options change the -definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3475"></A> for common acronym formats +and ignore the package options: <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3664"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3673"></A>, +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="3682"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3691"></A>, <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3700"></A> and +<TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="3709"></A>, as these options change the +definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3713"></A> for common acronym formats as well as the way that the link text is displayed (see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>). Likewise you should ignore the new commands described in this section, @@ -2177,18 +2333,33 @@ such as <TT>\acrshort</TT>, as they vary according to the definition of <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:acronymsettings">Table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:acronymsettings">2</A> lists the package options and how the -<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="3481"></A> keys are used to store <I>long</I> (the long -form) and <I>abbrv</I> (the short form). Note that the -<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3489"></A> option redefines <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="3493"></A> so that it sets -its argument using <TT>\textsc</TT> (so you should use lower case characters -in <I>abbrv</I>) and the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3501"></A> option redefines -<TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use <TT>\smaller</TT><A NAME="tex2html11" - HREF="#foot2130"><SUP>5</SUP></A>, otherwise <TT>\acronymfont</TT> simply -displays its argument in the surrounding font. Note also that if none -of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3511"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3520"></A>, -<TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3529"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3538"></A> or <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3547"></A> are used, -<TT>\acronymfont</TT> is not used, so changing the definition of -<TT>\acronymfont</TT> will have no effect under such circumstances. +<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="3719"></A> keys are used to store <I>long</I> (the long +form) and <I>abbrv</I> (the short form). Note that the +<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3727"></A> option redefines +<TT>\acronymfont</TT> so that it sets its +argument using <TT>\textsc</TT> (so you should use lower case characters in +<I>abbrv</I>) and the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3736"></A> option redefines +<TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use <TT>\smaller</TT>,<A NAME="tex2html12" + HREF="#foot2250"><SUP>5</SUP></A> otherwise <TT>\acronymfont</TT> simply displays its argument +in the surrounding font. Note also that if none of the package options +<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3746"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3755"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3764"></A>, +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="3773"></A> or <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3782"></A> are used, <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is +not used, so changing the definition of <TT>\acronymfont</TT> will have no +effect under such circumstances. + +<P> +If you want to display the acronym in another font, for example, +emphasized, then use the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3791"></A> package option and +redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="3795"></A> to use the required font. For example: +<PRE> +\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} +</PRE> +Where <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is available, +<TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> is also +available. By default, this simply uses <TT>\acronymfont</TT>, but it +can be redefined to change the way the acronym is displayed on +first use. <P> <BR><P></P> @@ -2196,54 +2367,54 @@ of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3511"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A <A NAME="tab:acronymsettings"></A> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="2131"></A> +<A NAME="2251"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 2:</STRONG> Package options governing <TT>\newacronym</TT> and how the information is stored in the keys for <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></CAPTION> <TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Package Option </B></TH> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>first</TT><A NAME="3551"></A> key</TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>text</TT><A NAME="3554"></A> key</TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3557"></A> key</TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3560"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>first</TT><A NAME="3798"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>text</TT><A NAME="3801"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3804"></A> key</TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="3807"></A> key</TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3568"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3577"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3815"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3824"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3586"></A>,<TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3595"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3833"></A>,<TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3842"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3604"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3851"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3613"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3860"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3622"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3869"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3631"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3878"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3640"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3887"></A></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> <TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD> @@ -2289,20 +2460,20 @@ If the first use uses the plural form, <code>\glspl{dm}</code> will display: diagonal matrices (DMs). <P> -Each of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3650"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3659"></A>, -<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3668"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3677"></A> -and <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3686"></A> use <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3690"></A> and -<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3693"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>) +Each of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3897"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3906"></A>, +<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3915"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3924"></A> +and <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3933"></A> use <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3937"></A> and +<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3940"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>) to change the way the link text is displayed. <P> <DL> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3701"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3710"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3948"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3957"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> When these two package options are used together, the first use displays the entry as: <BR> -<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR><TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> while subsequent use displays the entry as: @@ -2317,34 +2488,34 @@ variants. <P> Note also that when these two package options are used (in the given order), the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the -<TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="3720"></A> option using -<A NAME="3729"></A><A NAME="3736"></A><code>sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}</code>, so +<TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="3967"></A> option using +<A NAME="3976"></A><A NAME="3983"></A><code>sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG>dua</STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3990"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -The <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3743"></A> package option always displays the expanded -form and so may not be used with <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3752"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3761"></A> or -<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3770"></A>. Both first use and subsequent use displays the +The <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3999"></A> package option always displays the expanded +form and so may not be used with <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="4008"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="4017"></A> or +<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="4026"></A>. Both first use and subsequent use displays the entry in the form: <BR> <BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> <BR> <BR> -If the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3779"></A> package option is also used, the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3783"></A> key is set to the long form, otherwise the -<TT>name</TT><A NAME="3786"></A> key is set to the short form and the -<TT>description</TT><A NAME="3789"></A> key is set to the long form. +If the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="4035"></A> package option is also used, the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="4039"></A> key is set to the long form, otherwise the +<TT>name</TT><A NAME="4042"></A> key is set to the short form and the +<TT>description</TT><A NAME="4045"></A> key is set to the long form. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="3797"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="4053"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> This package option displays the entry on first use as: <BR> -<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) +<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) <BR> <BR> while subsequent use displays the entry as: @@ -2354,16 +2525,16 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: <BR> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="3807"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="4063"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3814"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="4070"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> This package option displays the entry on first use as: <BR> -<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> +<BR><TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> while subsequent use displays the entry as: @@ -2373,17 +2544,17 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: <P> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="3824"></A><code>sanitize={description=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="4080"></A><code>sanitize={description=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3831"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="4087"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3840"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3849"></A> options +If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="4096"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="4105"></A> options have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as: <BR> -<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) +<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) <BR> <BR> while subsequent use displays the entry as: @@ -2397,17 +2568,17 @@ should be specified in lower case. <P> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="3859"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="4115"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> -<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3866"></A></STRONG></DT> +<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="4122"></A></STRONG></DT> <DD> -If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3875"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3884"></A> options +If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="4131"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="4140"></A> options have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as: <BR> -<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) +<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>) <BR> <BR> while subsequent use displays the entry as: @@ -2418,17 +2589,21 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: where <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is set to <code>{\smaller #1}</code>. <P> +Remember to load a package that defines <TT>\smaller</TT><A NAME="4144"></A> (such as +<TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="4147"></A>) if you want to use this option. + +<P> Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the option -<A NAME="3894"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so +<A NAME="4156"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>None of the above</STRONG></DT> <DD> -If none of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="3901"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="3910"></A>, -<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="3919"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="3928"></A> or <TT>description</TT><A NAME="3937"></A> are used, +If none of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="4163"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="4172"></A>, +<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="4181"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="4190"></A> or <TT>description</TT><A NAME="4199"></A> are used, then on first use the entry is displayed as: <BR> <BR><I>long</I> (<I>abbrv</I>)<I>insert</I> @@ -2436,8 +2611,6 @@ then on first use the entry is displayed as: <BR> while subsequent use displays the entry as: <BR> -<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I> -<BR> <BR><I>abbrv</I><I>insert</I> </DD> </DL> @@ -2445,7 +2618,7 @@ while subsequent use displays the entry as: <P> Recall from <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">earlier</A> that you can access the values of individual keys using commands -like <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3941"></A>, so it is possible to use these commands to +like <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="4203"></A>, so it is possible to use these commands to print just the long form or just the abbreviation without affecting the flag that determines whether the entry has been used. However the keys that store the long and short form vary depending on @@ -2465,8 +2638,8 @@ as follows: <BR> Print the abbreviated version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the relevant entry in the glossary. This is usually equivalent to -<TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="3945"></A> (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally -put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="3948"></A>. +<TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="4207"></A> (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally +put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="4210"></A>. <BR> <BR> <P> @@ -2480,7 +2653,7 @@ put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="3948" <BR> Print the long version with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the relevant entry in the glossary. This is may be equivalent to -<TT>\glsdesc</TT><A NAME="3951"></A>, <TT>\glssymbol</TT><A NAME="3954"></A> or <TT>\glsfirst</TT><A NAME="3957"></A> (or their uppercase +<TT>\glsdesc</TT><A NAME="4213"></A>, <TT>\glssymbol</TT><A NAME="4216"></A> or <TT>\glsfirst</TT><A NAME="4219"></A> (or their uppercase variants), depending on package options. <BR> <BR> @@ -2498,16 +2671,16 @@ with a hyperlink (if necessary) to the relevant entry in the glossary. <P> -Note that if you change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="3960"></A>, you +Note that if you change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="4222"></A>, you may additionally need to change the above commands as well as -the changing way the text is displayed using <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="3963"></A> -and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="3966"></A>. +the changing way the text is displayed using <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="4225"></A> +and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="4228"></A>. <P> -The package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="3974"></A> provides the synonyms listed +The package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="4236"></A> provides the synonyms listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:shortcuts">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:shortcuts">3</A>. If any of those commands generate an "undefined control sequence" error message, check that you -have enabled the shortcuts using the <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="3986"></A> package +have enabled the shortcuts using the <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="4248"></A> package option. Note that there are no shortcuts for the commands that produce all upper case text. @@ -2517,60 +2690,60 @@ produce all upper case text. <A NAME="tab:shortcuts"></A> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="2143"></A> +<A NAME="2263"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 3:</STRONG> -Synonyms provided by the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="3995"></A></CAPTION> +Synonyms provided by the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="4257"></A></CAPTION> <TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Shortcut Command </B></TH> <TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Equivalent Command</B></TH> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acs</TT><A NAME="3999"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshort</TT><A NAME="4002"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acs</TT><A NAME="4261"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshort</TT><A NAME="4264"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acs</TT><A NAME="4005"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshort</TT><A NAME="4008"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acs</TT><A NAME="4267"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshort</TT><A NAME="4270"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acsp</TT><A NAME="4011"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="4014"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acsp</TT><A NAME="4273"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="4276"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acsp</TT><A NAME="4017"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="4020"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acsp</TT><A NAME="4279"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="4282"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acl</TT><A NAME="4023"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="4026"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acl</TT><A NAME="4285"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="4288"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acl</TT><A NAME="4029"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlong</TT><A NAME="4032"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acl</TT><A NAME="4291"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlong</TT><A NAME="4294"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\aclp</TT><A NAME="4035"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="4038"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\aclp</TT><A NAME="4297"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="4300"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Aclp</TT><A NAME="4041"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="4044"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Aclp</TT><A NAME="4303"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="4306"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acf</TT><A NAME="4047"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfull</TT><A NAME="4050"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acf</TT><A NAME="4309"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfull</TT><A NAME="4312"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acf</TT><A NAME="4053"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfull</TT><A NAME="4056"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acf</TT><A NAME="4315"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfull</TT><A NAME="4318"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acfp</TT><A NAME="4059"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="4062"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acfp</TT><A NAME="4321"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="4324"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acfp</TT><A NAME="4065"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="4068"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acfp</TT><A NAME="4327"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="4330"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\ac</TT><A NAME="4071"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="4074"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\ac</TT><A NAME="4333"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="4336"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Ac</TT><A NAME="4077"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="4080"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Ac</TT><A NAME="4339"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="4342"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acp</TT><A NAME="4083"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="4086"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acp</TT><A NAME="4345"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="4348"></A></TD> </TR> -<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acp</TT><A NAME="4089"></A></TD> -<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="4092"></A></TD> +<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acp</TT><A NAME="4351"></A></TD> +<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="4354"></A></TD> </TR> </TABLE> </DIV> @@ -2589,11 +2762,11 @@ Unsetting and resetting entry flags</A> </H2> <P> -When using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="4098"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="4101"></A> and their uppercase variants it is +When using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="4360"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="4363"></A> and their uppercase variants it is possible that you may want to use the value given by the -<TT>first</TT><A NAME="4104"></A> key, even though you have already used the glossary +<TT>first</TT><A NAME="4366"></A> key, even though you have already used the glossary entry. Conversely, you may want to use the value given by the -<TT>text</TT><A NAME="4107"></A> key, even though you haven't used the glossary entry. +<TT>text</TT><A NAME="4369"></A> key, even though you haven't used the glossary entry. The former can be achieved by one of the following commands: <BR> <BR><TT>\glsreset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -2630,7 +2803,7 @@ The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with some pre-defined glossary styles. These are as follows: <DL> <DT><STRONG>list</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4114"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> +<DD>The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4376"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment. The entry name is placed in the optional argument of the <TT>\item</TT> command (so it will appear in bold by default). The description follows, and then the associated number @@ -2639,34 +2812,51 @@ list for that entry. Sub groups are separated using <TT>\indexspace</TT>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="4117"></A> style is like -<TT>list</TT><A NAME="4119"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. +<DD>The <TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="4379"></A> style is like +<TT>list</TT><A NAME="4381"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="4121"></A> style is like -<TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="4123"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary -groups. +<DD>The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="4383"></A> style is like +<TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="4385"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +groups. The start of the glossary has a navigation panel to +each group that is present in the glossary. This requires an +additional run through LaTeX to ensure the group information +is up-to-date. In the navigation panel, each group is separated +by <TT>\glshypernavsep</TT> which +defaults to a vertical bar with a space on either side. For example, +to simply have a space separating each group, do: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space} +</PRE> + +<P> +Note that the hyper-navigation panel is now (as from version 1.14) +set inside the optional argument to <TT>\item</TT> instead of after it +to prevent a spurious space at the start. This can be changed +by redefining <TT>\glossaryheader</TT><A NAME="4387"></A>, but note that this needs to +be done <I>after</I> the glossary style has been set. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="4125"></A> style is like <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4127"></A> +<DD>The <TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="4390"></A> style is like <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4392"></A> but the description is placed on the following line. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="4129"></A> style is like -<TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="4131"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. +<DD>The <TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="4394"></A> style is like +<TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="4396"></A> but the glossary groups have headings. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>altlisthypergroup</TT><A NAME="4133"></A> style is like -<TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="4135"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary -groups. +<DD>The <TT>altlisthypergroup</TT><A NAME="4398"></A> style is like +<TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="4400"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary +groups. The navigation panel is the same as that for +<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="4402"></A>, described above. <P> </DD> @@ -2674,174 +2864,174 @@ groups. <DD>This style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment. Each entry starts with <code>\item[]</code>, followed by the name followed by a dotted line, followed by the description. Note that -this style ignores both the number list<A NAME="4137"></A> and the symbol. The +this style ignores both the number list<A NAME="4404"></A> and the symbol. The length <TT>\glslistdottedwidth</TT> -governs where the description should start.<A NAME="tex2html14" - HREF="#foot1732"><SUP>6</SUP></A> +governs where the description should start.<A NAME="tex2html15" + HREF="#foot1825"><SUP>6</SUP></A> <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long</TT><A NAME="4139"></A> style uses the <TT>longtable</TT> -environment (defined by the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="4142"></A> package). It has two +<DD>The <TT>long</TT><A NAME="4406"></A> style uses the <TT>longtable</TT> +environment (defined by the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="4409"></A> package). It has two columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second -column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="4144"></A>. +column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="4411"></A>. Sub groups are separated with a blank row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longborder</TT><A NAME="4146"></A> style is like -<TT>long</TT><A NAME="4148"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. +<DD>The <TT>longborder</TT><A NAME="4413"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="4415"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="4150"></A> style is like -<TT>long</TT><A NAME="4152"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="4417"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="4419"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>longheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4154"></A> style is -like <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="4156"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>longheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4421"></A> style is +like <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="4423"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4158"></A> style is like -<TT>long</TT><A NAME="4160"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains +<DD>The <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4425"></A> style is like +<TT>long</TT><A NAME="4427"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains the entry's name, the second column contains the description -and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="4161"></A>. +and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="4428"></A>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="4163"></A> style is like -the <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4165"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="4430"></A> style is like +the <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4432"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="4167"></A> style is like -<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4169"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="4434"></A> style is like +<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4436"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4171"></A> style is -like <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="4173"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4438"></A> style is +like <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="4440"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="4175"></A> style is like -<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4177"></A> but has an additional column in which the +<DD>The <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="4442"></A> style is like +<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="4444"></A> but has an additional column in which the entry's associated symbol appears. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="4179"></A> style is like -the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="4181"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="4446"></A> style is like +the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="4448"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="4183"></A> style is like -<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="4185"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="4450"></A> style is like +<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="4452"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4187"></A> style is -like <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="4189"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4454"></A> style is +like <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="4456"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super</TT><A NAME="4191"></A> style uses the <TT>supertabular</TT> -environment (defined by the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="4194"></A> package). It has two +<DD>The <TT>super</TT><A NAME="4458"></A> style uses the <TT>supertabular</TT> +environment (defined by the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="4461"></A> package). It has two columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second -column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="4196"></A>. +column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="4463"></A>. Sub groups are separated with a blank row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superborder</TT><A NAME="4198"></A> style is like -<TT>super</TT><A NAME="4200"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. +<DD>The <TT>superborder</TT><A NAME="4465"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="4467"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="4202"></A> style is like -<TT>super</TT><A NAME="4204"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="4469"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="4471"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>superheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4206"></A> style is -like <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="4208"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines +<DD>The <TT>superheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4473"></A> style is +like <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="4475"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4210"></A> style is like -<TT>super</TT><A NAME="4212"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains +<DD>The <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4477"></A> style is like +<TT>super</TT><A NAME="4479"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains the entry's name, the second column contains the description -and the third column contains the <A NAME="4213"></A>. +and the third column contains the <A NAME="4480"></A>. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3colborder</TT><A NAME="4215"></A> style is like -the <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4217"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super3colborder</TT><A NAME="4482"></A> style is like +the <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4484"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="4219"></A> style is like -<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4221"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="4486"></A> style is like +<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4488"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4223"></A> style -is like <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="4225"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4490"></A> style +is like <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="4492"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="4227"></A> style is like -<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4229"></A> but has an additional column in which the +<DD>The <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="4494"></A> style is like +<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="4496"></A> but has an additional column in which the entry's associated symbol appears. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="4231"></A> style is like -the <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="4233"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="4498"></A> style is like +the <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="4500"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="4235"></A> style is like -<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="4237"></A> but has a header row. +<DD>The <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="4502"></A> style is like +<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="4504"></A> but has a header row. <P> </DD> <DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT> -<DD>The <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4239"></A> style -is like <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="4241"></A> but has horizontal and vertical +<DD>The <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="4506"></A> style +is like <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="4508"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it. <P> @@ -2849,16 +3039,39 @@ lines around it. </DL> <P> -The glossary style can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="4248"></A> package option -or using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="4252"></A> key in the optional -argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="4255"></A> or using the command: +The glossary style can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="4515"></A> package option +or using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="4519"></A> key in the optional +argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="4522"></A> or using the command: <BR> <BR><TT>\glossarystyle{</TT><EM>style-name</EM><TT>}</TT> <BR> <BR> <P> +Note that if you use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="4525"></A> key in the +optional argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="4528"></A>, it will override any +previous style settings for the given glossary, so if, for example, +you do: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} +\printglossary[style=long] +</PRE> +The new definition of <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="4531"></A> will not have an affect +for this glossary, as <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> is redefined by +<code>style=long</code>. Likewise, <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="4534"></A> will also +override any previous style definitions, so, again: +<PRE> +\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} +\glossarystyle{long} +</PRE> +will reset <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> back to its default definition for the +named glossary style ("long" in this case). If you want to +modify the styles, either use <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT><A NAME="4537"></A> (described +in the next section) or make the modifications after +<TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="4540"></A>. + +<P> All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the -<TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="4258"></A> style use the command +<TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="4543"></A> style use the command <TT>\glspostdescription</TT> after the description. This simply displays a full stop by default. To eliminate this full stop (or replace it with something else, say a comma) you @@ -2894,7 +3107,7 @@ This environment defines how the main body of the glossary should be typeset. Note that this does not include the section heading, the glossary preamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>) or the glossary postamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypostamble</TT>.) For example, -the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4264"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment, +the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4549"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment, so the <TT>theglossary</TT> environment is simply redefined to begin and end the <TT>description</TT> environment. @@ -2907,8 +3120,8 @@ and end the <TT>description</TT> environment. This macro indicates what to do at the start of the main body of the glossary. Note that this is not the same as <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>, which should not be affected by changes in -the glossary style. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4269"></A> glossary style redefines -<TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do nothing, whereas the <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="4271"></A> +the glossary style. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4554"></A> glossary style redefines +<TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do nothing, whereas the <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="4556"></A> glossary style redefines <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do a header row. <P> @@ -2920,14 +3133,14 @@ glossary style redefines <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do a header row. This macro indicates what to do at the start of each logical block within the main body of the glossary. The glossary is sub-divided into twenty-eight logical blocks that are determined by the first character -of the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="4273"></A> key (or <TT>name</TT><A NAME="4276"></A> key if the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="4279"></A> +of the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="4558"></A> key (or <TT>name</TT><A NAME="4561"></A> key if the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="4564"></A> key is omitted). The sub-divisions are in the following order: symbols, numbers, A, ..., Z. Note that the argument to <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> is a label <I>not</I> the group title. The group title can be obtained via <TT>\glsgetgrouptitle{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>, and a navigation hypertarget can be created using <TT>\glsnavhypertarget{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>. Most of the predefined glossary styles redefine <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> to simply -ignore its argument. The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="4282"></A> style redefines +ignore its argument. The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="4567"></A> style redefines <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> as follows: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% @@ -2943,7 +3156,7 @@ See also <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> below. (Note that command definitions withi <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> <P> This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before -the header for the next logical group. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4284"></A> glossary +the header for the next logical group. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4569"></A> glossary style simply redefines <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> to be <TT>\indexspace</TT>. <P> @@ -2961,15 +3174,15 @@ font for the entry name, regardless of the glossary style used. Note that <I>label</I> is the label used when the glossary entry was defined via either <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> or <TT>\newacronym</TT>. Each time you use a glossary entry it creates a -link<A NAME="tex2html15" - HREF="#foot2144"><SUP>7</SUP></A> +link<A NAME="tex2html16" + HREF="#foot2264"><SUP>7</SUP></A> using <TT>\@glslink{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> with the label <TT>glo:</TT><I>label</I>. Your new glossary style must therefore redefine <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> so that it uses <TT>\@glstarget</TT><code>{</code><TT>glo:</TT><I>label</I><code>}</code><TT>{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> -to ensure the hyperlinks function correctly.<A NAME="tex2html16" - HREF="#foot2145"><SUP>8</SUP></A> For example, the -<TT>list</TT><A NAME="4286"></A> style defines <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> as follows: +to ensure the hyperlinks function correctly.<A NAME="tex2html17" + HREF="#foot2265"><SUP>8</SUP></A> For example, the +<TT>list</TT><A NAME="4571"></A> style defines <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> as follows: <PRE> \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{% \item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}] ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5} @@ -2988,15 +3201,15 @@ may contain <TT>\delimN</TT> (to delimit individual numbers) and/or multiple occurrences of <TT>\setentrycounter{</TT><EM>counter name</EM><TT>}\glsnumberformat{</TT><EM>number(s)</EM><TT>}</TT>, but note that the entire number list is enclosed within the argument -to <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT><A NAME="4288"></A>. The user can redefine this to change +to <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT><A NAME="4573"></A>. The user can redefine this to change the way the entire number list is formatted, regardless of the glossary style. However the most common use of <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> is to provide a means of suppressing the -number list altogether. (In fact, the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="4296"></A> option +number list altogether. (In fact, the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="4581"></A> option redefines <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> to ignore its argument.) Therefore, when you define a new glossary style, you don't need to worry about whether the user has specified the -<TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="4305"></A> package option. +<TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="4590"></A> package option. </DD> </DL> <P> @@ -3025,7 +3238,7 @@ should do nothing) and suppose you don't want anything to appear immediately after <code>\begin{theglossary}</code> (so <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> should do nothing). In addition, let's suppose the symbol should appear in brackets after the name, followed by the description and -last of all the number list<A NAME="4313"></A> should appear within square brackets +last of all the number list<A NAME="4598"></A> should appear within square brackets at the end. Then you can create this new glossary style, called, say, <TT>mylist</TT>, as follows: <PRE> @@ -3063,7 +3276,7 @@ If you want to define a new style that is a slightly modified version of an existing style, you can use <TT>\glossarystyle</TT> within the second argument of <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT> followed by whatever alterations you require. For example, suppose you want -a style like the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4318"></A> style but you don't want the extra +a style like the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="4603"></A> style but you don't want the extra vertical space created by <TT>\indexspace</TT> between groups, then you can create a new glossary style called, say, <TT>mylist</TT> as follows: @@ -3087,7 +3300,7 @@ Mfirstuc Package <P> The <TT>glossaries</TT> package is supplied with the package -<TT>mfirstuc</TT><A NAME="4324"></A> which provides the command: +<TT>mfirstuc</TT><A NAME="4609"></A> which provides the command: <BR> <BR> <TT>\makefirstuc{</TT><EM>stuff</EM><TT>}</TT> @@ -3095,7 +3308,7 @@ The <TT>glossaries</TT> package is supplied with the package <BR> which makes the first object of <I>stuff</I> uppercase unless <I>stuff</I> starts with a control -sequence followed by a group, in which case the first +sequence followed by a non-empty group, in which case the first object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples: <UL> @@ -3104,7 +3317,7 @@ object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples: <P> </LI> <LI><code>\makefirstuc{\emph{abc}}</code> produces <I>Abc</I> -(<TT>\MakeUppercase</TT><A NAME="4327"></A> has been applied to the letter "a" rather +(<TT>\MakeUppercase</TT><A NAME="4612"></A> has been applied to the letter "a" rather than <TT>\emph</TT>.) <P> @@ -3122,9 +3335,11 @@ than <TT>\emph</TT>.) </UL> <P> -Note however that <code>\makefirstuc{\ae{}bc}</code> produces æBc since -the empty group following <TT>\ae</TT> is considered to be the argument -of <TT>\ae</TT> which is in fact not the case. +In version 1.02 of <TT>mfirstuc</TT>, a bug fix resulted in a change +in output if the first object is a control sequence followed by +an empty group. Prior to version 1.02, <code>\makefirstuc{\ae{}bc}</code> +produced æBc. However as from version 1.02, it now produces +Æbc. <P> Note also that @@ -3153,6 +3368,18 @@ This is equivalent to <TT>\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{</ produces: Abc. <P> +If you want to use an alternative command to convert to uppercase, +for example <TT>\MakeTextUppercase</TT><A NAME="tex2html18" + HREF="#foot2266"><SUP>9</SUP></A>, you can redefine the internal +command <TT>\@gls@makefirstuc</TT>. For example: +<PRE> +\renewcommand{\@gls@makefirstuc}[1]{\MakeTextUppercase #1} +</PRE> +(Remember that command names that contain the @ character must +either be placed in packages or be placed between <TT>\makeatletter</TT> +<TT>\makeatother</TT>.) + +<P> <P> <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A> @@ -3166,790 +3393,841 @@ produces: Abc. Index</A> </H2><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Ac</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4071">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4077">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4333">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4339">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acf</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4047">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4053">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4309">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4315">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acfp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4059">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4065">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4321">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4327">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4023">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4029">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4285">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4291">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Aclp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4035">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4041">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4297">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4303">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4083">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4089">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4345">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4351">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrfull</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4050">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4056">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4312">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4318">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4062">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4068">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4324">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4330">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrlong</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4026">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4032">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4288">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4294">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4038">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4044">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4300">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4306">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymfont</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3493">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3948">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3795">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4210">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2237">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2362">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymtype</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2429">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2698">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3043">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2646">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2915">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3260">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrshort</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4002">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4008">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4264">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4270">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4014">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4020">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4276">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4282">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acs</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3999">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4005">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4261">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4267">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\Acsp</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4011">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4017">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4273">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4279">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>babel</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2203">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2207">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2222">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2267">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2325">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2329">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2347">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2392">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2490">Troubleshooting</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplay</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3690">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3963">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3937">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4225">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3693">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3966">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3940">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4228">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\descriptionname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2252">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2377">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\emph</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2487">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2704">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\entryname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2249">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2374">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG>file types</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>.alg</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2314">Generating the associated glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2439">Generating the associated glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>.glg</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2312">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2375">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2437">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2592">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG>.glo</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2881">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3098">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>.gls</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2883">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3100">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>.ist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2286">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2897">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2902">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2411">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3114">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3119">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>.nlg</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2373">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2590">A Quick Guide For</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>german</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2219">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2344">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2194">Introduction</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2316">Introduction</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2486">Troubleshooting</A> <DT><STRONG>glossary styles</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4125">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4131">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4390">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4396">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4129">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4135">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4394">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4400">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4133">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4398">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>list</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4114">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4119">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4127">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4264">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4269">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4284">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4286">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4318">Example: creating a new</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4376">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4381">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4392">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4549">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4554">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4569">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4571">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4603">Example: creating a new</A> <DT><STRONG>listdotted</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4258">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4543">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4117">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4123">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4379">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4385">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4121">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4282">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4383">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4402">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4567">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>long</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4139">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4148">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4152">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4160">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4406">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4415">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4419">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4427">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4158">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4165">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4169">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4177">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4425">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4432">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4436">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4444">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4163">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4430">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4167">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4173">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4434">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4440">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4171">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4438">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2520">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4175">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4181">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4185">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2737">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4442">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4448">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4452">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2524">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4179">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2741">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4446">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2522">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4183">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4189">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2739">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4450">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4456">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2526">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4187">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2743">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4454">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4146">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4413">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4150">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4156">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4271">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4417">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4423">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4556">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4154">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4421">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4191">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4200">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4204">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4212">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4458">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4467">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4471">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4479">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4210">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4217">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4221">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4229">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4477">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4484">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4488">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4496">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4215">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4482">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4219">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4225">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4486">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4492">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4223">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4490">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2528">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4227">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4233">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4237">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2745">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4494">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4500">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4504">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2532">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4231">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2749">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4498">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2530">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4235">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4241">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2747">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4502">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4508">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2534">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4239">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2751">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4506">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4198">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4465">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4202">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4208">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4469">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4475">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4206">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4473">Glossary Styles</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-list</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2447">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2664">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4288">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4573">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryheader</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4387">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2234">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2359">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glossarystyle</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2545">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3365">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2762">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3579">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4534">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4540">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\gls</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2411">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2456">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2459">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2462">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2505">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2940">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2949">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3180">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3244">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3296">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4074">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4080">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4098">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2508">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2511">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2514">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2628">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2673">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2676">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2679">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2722">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3157">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3166">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3394">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3458">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3510">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4336">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4342">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4360">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsadd</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2493">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2508">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2529">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2710">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2725">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsaddall</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2496">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2511">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2532">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2713">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2728">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsaddall</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>types</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3317">Adding an entry to</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3531">Adding an entry to</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glscompositor</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2387">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2604">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdesc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3951">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4213">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisplay</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2919">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3009">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3136">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3226">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2922">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3012">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3139">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3229">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsfirst</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3957">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4219">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsgroupskip</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4531">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2474">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2502">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3171">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3293">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3311">Adding an entry to</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2526">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2691">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2719">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3385">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3507">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3525">Adding an entry to</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3149">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3363">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>format</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2477">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2480">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2490">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3136">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2694">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2697">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2707">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3350">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>hyper</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3152">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3299">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3314">Adding an entry to</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3366">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3513">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3528">Adding an entry to</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsnamefont</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2444">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2453">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2661">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2670">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2264">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2389">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glspl</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2414">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2465">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2468">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2471">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2925">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2928">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2931">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2958">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2970">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3015">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3018">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3021">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3247">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4086">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4092">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4101">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2517">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2520">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2523">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2631">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2682">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2685">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2688">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3142">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3145">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3148">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3175">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3187">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3232">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3235">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3238">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3461">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4348">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4354">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4363">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2961">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2979">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3178">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3196">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glssymbol</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3954">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4216">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2261">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2386">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glstext</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3186">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3192">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3198">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3204">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3216">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3228">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3941">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3945">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3400">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3406">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3412">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3418">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3430">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3442">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4203">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4207">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\glstextformat</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3272">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3486">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>html</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2328">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3289">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2545">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3503">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperemph</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2484">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2701">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperlink</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3302">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3516">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>hyperref</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2325">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3142">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3286">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3308">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2542">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3356">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3500">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3522">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\hypertarget</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3305">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3519">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\item</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2450">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2667">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG>link text</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3132">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3133">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3134">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3154">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3242">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3270">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3281">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3346">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3347">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3348">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3368">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3456">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3484">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3495">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>longtable</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4142">Glossary Styles</A> -<DT><STRONG><TT>\makefirstuc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3055">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4409">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>makeglossaries</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2277">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2288">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2291">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2306">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2331">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2334">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2340">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2358">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2367">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2390">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2891">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3323">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3332">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3378">Defining New Glossaries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2402">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2413">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2416">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2431">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2482">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2499">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2535">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2548">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2551">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2557">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2575">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2584">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2607">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3108">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3537">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3546">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3616">Defining New Glossaries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>makeindex</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2280">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2283">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2294">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2309">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2355">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2361">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2364">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2370">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2499">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2517">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2894">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2899">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3030">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3036">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3139">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3326">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3329">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3375">Defining New Glossaries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2405">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2408">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2419">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2434">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2572">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2578">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2581">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2587">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2716">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2734">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3111">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3116">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3247">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3253">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3353">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3540">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3543">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3613">Defining New Glossaries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\MakeUppercase</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4327">Mfirstuc Package</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4612">Mfirstuc Package</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>mfirstuc</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4324">Mfirstuc Package</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4609">Mfirstuc Package</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newacronym</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2426">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2818">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2830">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2842">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2854">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2866">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3475">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3960">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2643">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3035">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3047">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3059">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3071">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3083">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3713">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4222">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossary</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2352">A Quick Guide For</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2569">A Quick Guide For</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2402">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2441">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3129">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3162">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3481">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2619">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2658">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3343">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3376">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3719">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2408">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2761">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2776">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2788">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2913">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2907">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2934">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3231">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3234">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3237">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3262">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3557">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3789">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2625">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2978">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2993">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3005">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3130">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3124">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3151">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3445">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3448">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3451">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3476">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3804">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4045">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>descriptionplural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2916">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3133">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>first</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2946">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2976">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2982">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2985">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2991">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3000">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3159">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3168">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3189">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3256">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3551">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4104">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3163">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3193">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3199">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3202">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3208">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3217">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3373">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3382">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3403">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3470">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3798">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4366">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> <DT><STRONG>firstplural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2967">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2988">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2997">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3067">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3177">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3201">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3259">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3184">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3205">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3214">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3281">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3391">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3415">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3473">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG>format</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3146">Links to Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3360">Links to Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>name</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2405">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2758">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2779">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2785">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2800">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2803">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2910">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2904">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2943">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3033">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3207">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3210">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3213">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3783">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3786">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4276">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2622">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2975">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2996">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3002">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3017">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3020">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3127">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3121">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3160">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3250">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3421">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3424">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3427">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4039">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4042">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4561">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>plural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2423">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2955">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2973">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2994">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3061">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3064">Plurals</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3174">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3195">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3253">Changing the format of</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2640">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3172">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3190">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3211">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3275">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3278">Plurals</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3388">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3409">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3467">Changing the format of</A> <DT><STRONG>sort</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2514">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2794">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3027">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4273">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4279">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2731">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3011">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3244">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4558">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4564">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2764">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2782">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2791">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3003">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3024">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3219">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3222">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3225">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3265">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3268">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3279">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3560">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2981">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2999">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3008">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3220">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3241">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3433">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3436">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3439">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3479">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3482">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3493">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3807">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>symbolplural</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3006">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3223">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG>text</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2797">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2806">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2937">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2952">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2964">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3156">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3165">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3183">Links to Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3250">Changing the format of</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3554">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4107">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3014">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3023">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3154">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3169">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3181">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3370">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3379">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3397">Links to Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3464">Changing the format of</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3801">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4369">Unsetting and resetting entry</A> <DT><STRONG>type</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2417">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2420">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3040">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3073">Loading Entries From a</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2634">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2637">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3257">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3287">Loading Entries From a</A> </DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossarystyle</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4537">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>ngerman</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2216">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2341">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG>number list</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2736">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2746">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3106">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3373">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4137">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4144">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4161">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4196">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4213">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4313">Example: creating a completely</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2953">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2963">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3320">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3611">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4404">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4411">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4428">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4463">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4480">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4598">Example: creating a completely</A> <DT><STRONG>package options</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>acronym</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2245">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2247">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2302">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2304">Generating the associated glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2382">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2384">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2437">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2439">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2639">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2641">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2693">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2695">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2706">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2708">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2715">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2717">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3051">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3053">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3081">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3083">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3090">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3092">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3099">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3101">Loading Entries From a</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3386">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3388">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3395">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3397">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3404">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3406">Defining New Glossaries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3417">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3419">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2370">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2372">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2427">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2429">Generating the associated glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2599">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2601">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2654">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2656">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2856">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2858">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2910">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2912">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2923">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2925">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2932">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2934">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3268">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3270">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3295">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3297">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3304">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3306">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3313">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3315">Loading Entries From a</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3624">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3626">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3633">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3635">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3642">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3644">Defining New Glossaries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3655">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3657">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2743">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2745">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3122">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3124">Number lists</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2960">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2962">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3336">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3338">Number lists</A> <DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2814">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2816">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3444">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3446">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3538">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3540">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3568">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3570">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3586">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3588">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3604">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3606">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3686">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3688">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3701">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3703">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3779">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3781">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3797">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3799">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3849">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3031">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3033">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3682">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3684">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3773">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3775">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3815">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3817">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3833">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3835">Acronyms</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3851">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3884">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3886">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3937">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3939">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3853">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3933">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3935">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3948">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3950">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4035">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4037">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4053">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4055">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4105">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4107">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4140">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4142">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4199">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4201">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>dua</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2862">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2864">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3453">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3455">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3529">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3531">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3595">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3597">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3640">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3642">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3677">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3679">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3743">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3745">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3928">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3930">Acronyms</A> -<DT><STRONG>footnote</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2826">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2828">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3462">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3464">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3547">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3549">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3577">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3579">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3613">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3615">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3668">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3670">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3710">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3712">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3752">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3754">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3814">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3816">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3840">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3079">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3081">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3691">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3693">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3764">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3766">Acronyms</A> | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3842">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3875">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3877">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3919">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3921">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3844">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3887">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3889">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3924">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3926">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3990">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3992">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3999">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4001">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4190">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4192">Acronyms</A> +<DT><STRONG>footnote</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3043">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3045">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3700">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3702">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3782">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3784">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3824">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3826">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3860">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3862">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3915">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3917">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3957">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3959">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4008">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4010">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4070">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4072">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4096">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4098">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4131">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4133">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4181">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4183">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2554">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2556">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2733">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2735">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3113">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3115">Number lists</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4296">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4298">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4305">Defining your own glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4307">Defining your own glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2771">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2773">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2950">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2952">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3327">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3329">Number lists</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4581">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4583">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4590">Defining your own glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4592">Defining your own glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>numberedsection</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2660">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2662">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2669">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2671">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2684">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2877">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2879">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2886">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2888">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2901">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3590">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3592">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3599">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3601">Displaying a glossary</A> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>autolabel</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2686">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2677">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2903">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2894">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>false</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2673">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2890">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>nolabel</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2675">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2892">Package Options</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG>numberline</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2594">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2596">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2630">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2632">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2811">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2813">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2847">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2849">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>sanitize</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2753">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2755">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2772">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2774">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3720">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3722">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3728">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3735">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3806">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3823">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3858">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3893">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2970">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2972">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2989">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2991">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3967">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3969">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3975">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3982">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4062">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4079">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4114">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4155">Acronyms</A> <DD><DL COMPACT> <DT><STRONG>description</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3729">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3824">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3976">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4080">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3736">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3807">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3859">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3894">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3983">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4063">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4115">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4156">Acronyms</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG>section</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2563">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2565">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2572">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2574">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2648">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2650">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2780">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2782">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2789">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2791">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2865">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2867">Package Options</A> <DT><STRONG>shortcuts</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2874">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2876">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3471">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3473">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3974">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3976">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3986">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3988">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3995">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3997">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3995">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3997">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3091">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3093">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3709">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3711">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4236">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4238">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4248">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4250">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4257">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4259">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4257">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4259">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>smallcaps</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2838">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2840">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3426">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3428">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3489">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3491">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3511">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3513">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3622">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3624">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3650">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3652">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3770">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3772">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3831">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3833">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3901">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3903">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2451">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2453">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2460">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2462">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3055">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3057">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3664">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3666">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3727">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3729">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3746">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3748">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3869">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3871">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3897">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3899">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4026">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4028">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4087">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4089">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4163">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4165">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>smaller</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2850">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2852">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3435">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3437">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3501">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3503">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3520">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3522">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3631">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3633">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3659">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3661">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3761">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3763">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3866">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3868">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3910">Acronyms</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3912">Acronyms</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2469">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2471">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2478">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2480">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3067">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3069">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3673">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3675">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3736">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3738">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3755">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3757">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3791">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3793">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3878">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3880">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3906">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3908">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4017">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4019">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4122">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4124">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4172">Acronyms</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4174">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG>style</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2541">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2543">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2724">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2726">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3361">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3363">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4248">Glossary Styles</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4250">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2758">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2760">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2941">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2943">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3575">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3577">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4515">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4517">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>toc</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2348">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2350">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2398">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2400">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2585">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2587">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2603">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2605">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2612">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2614">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2621">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2623">Package Options</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3349">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3351">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2565">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2567">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2615">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2617">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2802">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2804">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2820">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2822">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2829">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2831">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2838">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2840">Package Options</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3563">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3565">Displaying a glossary</A> </DL> <DT><STRONG><TT>\pagelistname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2258">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2383">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossaries</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2337">A Quick Guide For</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2888">Defining Glossary Entries</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2505">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2554">A Quick Guide For</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3105">Defining Glossary Entries</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2885">Defining Glossary Entries</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4255">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2502">Troubleshooting</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3102">Defining Glossary Entries</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4522">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4528">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT> keys</STRONG> <DD><DL COMPACT> +<DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3603">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DT><STRONG>numberedsection</STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3582">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>style</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3353">Displaying a glossary</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4252">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3567">Displaying a glossary</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4519">Glossary Styles</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4525">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG>title</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3338">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3552">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>toctitle</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3341">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3555">Displaying a glossary</A> <DT><STRONG>type</STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3335">Displaying a glossary</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#3549">Displaying a glossary</A> </DL> +<DT><STRONG><TT>relsize</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4147">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\setglossarysection</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2652">Package Options</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2869">Package Options</A> +<DT><STRONG><TT>\smaller</TT></STRONG> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4144">Acronyms</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>supertabular</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4194">Glossary Styles</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4461">Glossary Styles</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>\symbolname</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2255">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2380">Multi-Lingual Support</A> <DT><STRONG><TT>translator</TT></STRONG> -<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2210">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2213">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2225">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2228">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2270">Multi-Lingual Support</A> - | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2273">Multi-Lingual Support</A> +<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2332">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2335">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2338">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2350">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2353">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2395">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2398">Multi-Lingual Support</A> + | <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#2494">Troubleshooting</A> </DL> <P> @@ -3958,61 +4236,68 @@ Index</A> <P> <BR><HR><H4>Footnotes</H4> <DL> -<DT><A NAME="foot446">... +<DT><A NAME="foot515">... range</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html7"><SUP>1</SUP></A></DT> + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html8"><SUP>1</SUP></A></DT> <DD>This is new to version 1.01 </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot2039">...acronym</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html8"><SUP>2</SUP></A></DT> +<DT><A NAME="foot2159">...acronym</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html9"><SUP>2</SUP></A></DT> <DD>if the -<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2693"></A> option is used, otherwise the list of +<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="2910"></A> option is used, otherwise the list of acronyms is the main glossary </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot2059">... this.</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html9"><SUP>3</SUP></A></DT> +<DT><A NAME="foot2179">... this.</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html10"><SUP>3</SUP></A></DT> <DD>The only preamble restriction on <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> and <TT>\newacronym</TT> was removed in version 1.13, but the restriction remains for <TT>\loadglsentries</TT>. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot2102">... label</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html10"><SUP>4</SUP></A></DT> +<DT><A NAME="foot2218">... label</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html11"><SUP>4</SUP></A></DT> <DD><TT>main</TT> for the main (default) glossary, <TT>\acronymtype</TT> for the list of acronyms, or the name supplied in the first mandatory argument to <TT>\newglossary</TT> for additional glossaries. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot2130">...smaller</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html11"><SUP>5</SUP></A></DT> -<DD><TT>\smaller</TT> is defined -in the <TT>relsize</TT> package. +<DT><A NAME="foot2250">...smaller,</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html12"><SUP>5</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>you will need to load a +package, such as <TT>relsize</TT>, that defines <TT>\smaller</TT> if you use +this option. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot1732">... start.</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html14"><SUP>6</SUP></A></DT> +<DT><A NAME="foot1825">... start.</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html15"><SUP>6</SUP></A></DT> <DD>This style was supplied by Axel Menzel. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot2144">... +<DT><A NAME="foot2264">... link</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html15"><SUP>7</SUP></A></DT> + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html16"><SUP>7</SUP></A></DT> <DD>if the document doesn't have hyperlinks enabled <TT>\@glslink</TT> ignores the label and simply typesets the text. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot2145">... correctly.</A><A - HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html16"><SUP>8</SUP></A></DT> +<DT><A NAME="foot2265">... correctly.</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html17"><SUP>8</SUP></A></DT> <DD>again, if the document doesn't support hyperlinks, <TT>\@glstarget</TT> will ignore the label, and just typeset the text. </DD> +<DT><A NAME="foot2266">...MakeTextUppercase</A><A + HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html18"><SUP>9</SUP></A></DT> +<DD>defined in the +<TT>textcase</TT> package + +</DD> </DL> <BR><HR> diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.tex index d46e6e58645..ac8cf241478 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries-manual.tex @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ \makeatother \RecordChanges \PageIndex -\CheckSum{5110} +\CheckSum{5121} \CodelineNumbered \newcommand*{\termdef}[1]{\emph{#1}\iterm{#1}} \newcommand*{\term}[1]{#1\iterm{#1}} @@ -31,6 +31,18 @@ \newcommand{\dq}[1]{``#1''} \newcommand*{\tableref}[1]{\hyperref[#1]{table~\ref*{#1}}} \newcommand*{\Tableref}[1]{\hyperref[#1]{Table~\ref*{#1}}} +\newlength\boxlength +\newsavebox\importantbox +\newenvironment{important}{% +\setlength{\fboxrule}{4pt}% +\setlength\boxlength{\linewidth}% +\addtolength\boxlength{-2\fboxsep}% +\addtolength\boxlength{-2\fboxrule}% +\begin{lrbox}{\importantbox}% +\begin{minipage}{\boxlength}% +}{\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}% +\par\vskip10pt\noindent +\fcolorbox{red}{white}{\usebox{\importantbox}}\par\vskip10pt} } { \usepackage{html} @@ -43,6 +55,7 @@ \newcommand{\dq}[1]{"#1"} \newcommand*{\tableref}[1]{\htmlref{table~}{#1}\ref{#1}} \newcommand*{\Tableref}[1]{\htmlref{Table~}{#1}\ref{#1}} +\newenvironment{important}{}{} } @@ -96,7 +109,7 @@ \MakeShortVerb{"} \DeleteShortVerb{\|} - \title{glossaries.sty v 1.13: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries} + \title{glossaries.sty v 1.14: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries} \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] School of Computing Sciences\\ University of East Anglia\\ @@ -104,7 +117,7 @@ Norwich. Norfolk\\ NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\ \url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}} - \date{12th May 2008} + \date{18th June 2008} \maketitle \tableofcontents @@ -135,6 +148,7 @@ code for the \sty{mfirstuc} package}{}. \ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} \subsection{Multi-Lingual Support} +\label{sec:languages} As from version 1.08, the \sty{glossaries} package now has limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent @@ -143,7 +157,15 @@ me the relevant translations either via email or via However you must load \isty{babel} \emph{before} \sty{glossaries} to enable this. Note that if \isty{babel} is loaded and the \isty{translator} package is detected on \TeX's path, then the -\isty{translator} package will be loaded automatically. +\isty{translator} package will be loaded automatically, however, +it may not pick up on the required languages, so if the predefined +text is not translated, you may need to explicitly load the +\isty{translator} package with the required languages. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[spanish]{babel} +\usepackage[spanish]{translator} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} If you want to use \isty{ngerman} or \isty{german} instead of \isty{babel}, you will need to include the \isty{translator} package @@ -269,13 +291,106 @@ If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files The \sty{glossaries} package comes with a minimal file called \texttt{minimalgls.tex} which can be used for testing. This -should be located in \texttt{texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/}. Further -information on debugging \LaTeX\ code is available at +should be located in \texttt{texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/}. +Further information on debugging \LaTeX\ code is available at \url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/}. -There is a list of frequently asked questions for the -\sty{glossaries} package available at -\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html}.\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} +Below is a list of the most frequently asked questions. For +other queries, consult the \sty{glossaries} FAQ at +\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html}. + +\begin{enumerate} +\item I've used the \pkgopt{smallcaps} option, but the acronyms +are displayed in normal sized upper case letters. + +The \pkgopt{smallcaps} package option uses \cs{textsc} to typeset +the acronyms. This command converts lower case letters to small +capitals, while upper case letters remain their usual size. Therefore +you need to specify the acronym in lower case letters. + +\item How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in? + +The easiest way to do this is to specify the \pkgopt{smaller} package +option and redefine \cs{acronymfont} to use the required typesetting +command. For example, suppose you would like the acronyms displayed in +a sans-serif font, then you can do: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\end{verbatim} + +\item How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in +on first use? + +The easiest way to do this is to specify the \pkgopt{smaller} package +option and redefine \cs{firstacronymfont} to use the required +command. Note that if you don't want the acronym on subsequent use +to use \cs{smaller}, you will also need to redefine \cs{acronymfont}, +as above. For example to make the acronym emphasized on first use, +but use the surrounding font for subsequent use, you can do: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +\renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} +\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{#1} +\end{verbatim} + +\item I don't have Perl installed, do I have to use +\appname{makeglossaries}? + +Read \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:makeglossaries}}{\htmlref{the previous +section}{sec:makeglossaries}}. + + +\item I'm used to using the \sty{glossary} package: are there any +instructions on migrating from the \isty{glossary} package to the +\sty{glossaries} package? + +Read \ifmakedtx{the file \texttt{glossary2glossaries.pdf}}{\htmladdnormallink{Upgrading +from the glossary package to the glossaries +package}{glossary2glossaries.html}} which should be available from the +same location as this document. + +\item I'm using \isty{babel} but the fixed names haven't been +translated. + +The \sty{glossaries} package currently only supports the following +languages: Danish, Dutch, English, French, German, Irish, Italian, +Hungarian, Polish and Spanish. If you want to add another language, +send me the translations, and I'll add them to the next version. + +If you are using one of the above languages, but the text hasn't been +translated, try adding the \isty{translator} package with the +required languages explicitly (before you load the \sty{glossaries} +package). For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} +\usepackage[ngerman]{translator} +\usepackage{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +Alternatively, you may be able to add the language as a global option +to the class file. Check the \sty{translator} package documentation for +further details. + +\item My glossaries haven't appeared. + +Remember to do the following: +\begin{itemize} +\item Add \ics{makeglossaries} to the document preamble. + +\item Use either \ics{printglossary} for each glossary that has +been defined or \ics{printglossaries}. + +\item Use \ics{gls}, \ics{Gls}, \ics{GLS}, \ics{glspl}, \ics{Glspl}, +\ics{GLSpl}, \ics{glslink}, \ics{glsadd} or \ics{glsaddall} in the +document. + +\item Run \LaTeX\ on your document, then run \appname{makeglossaries}, +then run \LaTeX\ on your document again. If you want the glossaries +to appear in the table of contents, you will need an extra \LaTeX\ +run. +\end{itemize} +\end{enumerate} +\ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} \section{A Quick Guide For The Impatient} \label{sec:quick} @@ -562,7 +677,7 @@ will be localised to the required text. \item Entries can be added to the glossary without producing any text using \ics{glsadd}\marg{label} or -\ics{glsaddall}. These commands also taken an optional +\ics{glsaddall}. These commands also take an optional argument where you can specify the format. For example \begin{verbatim} \glsadd[format=hyperbf]{singmtx} @@ -678,6 +793,7 @@ appear in unnumbered subsections: \changes{1.02}{2007 May 25}{added overview section} \subsection{Package Options} +\label{sec:pkgopts} The \sty{glossaries} package options are as follows: \begin{description} @@ -747,6 +863,23 @@ if the \pkgopt{acronym} option is used. For example: The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}. \end{verbatim} +As from version 1.14, you can add a prefix to the label by +redefining \DescribeMacro{\glsautoprefix}\cs{glsautoprefix}. +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{glo:} +\end{verbatim} +will add \texttt{glo:} to the automatically generated label, so +you can then, for example, refer to the list of acronyms as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{glo:\acronymtype}. +\end{verbatim} +Or, if you are undecided on a prefix: +\begin{verbatim} +The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\glsautoprefix\acronymtype}. +\end{verbatim} + + \item[\pkgopt{style}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. Its value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined glossary styles are listed \ifmakedtx{in \autoref{sec:styles}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:styles}}. @@ -776,6 +909,7 @@ further details.)}{} For example, to switch off the sanitization for the symbol=true}]{glossaries} \end{verbatim} +\begin{important}% \textbf{Note}: this sanitization only applies to the \gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description} and \gloskey{symbol} keys. It doesn't apply to any of the other keys (except the \gloskey{sort} key which is @@ -784,6 +918,7 @@ the other keys must always be protected using \cs{protect}. Since the value of the \gloskey{text} key is obtained from the \gloskey{name} key, you will still need to protect fragile commands in the \gloskey{name} key if you don't use the \gloskey{text} key. +\end{important} \item[\pkgopt{description}] This option changes the definition of \ics{newacronym} to allow a description. See \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:acronyms}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:acronyms}} @@ -889,6 +1024,7 @@ uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is obtained from the \gloskey{plural} key, if the \gloskey{first} key is omitted, or by appending \ics{glspluralsuffix} to the value of the \gloskey{first} field, if the \gloskey{first} field is present. + \textbf{Note:} prior to version 1.13, the default value of \gloskey{firstplural} was always taken by appending \dq{s} to the \gloskey{first} key, which meant that you had to specify both @@ -925,24 +1061,6 @@ problem for commands like \cs{Gls} and \cs{Glspl}. For example: \newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, description={select group or class}} \end{verbatim} -Similarly, commands such as \cs{ae} and \cs{oe} should either be placed -inside a group or followed by a space. For example: -\begin{verbatim} -\newglossaryentry{oesophagus}{% -name={{\oe}sophagus}, -description={canal from mouth to stomach}} -\end{verbatim} -The following is also fine: -\begin{verbatim} -\newglossaryentry{oesophagus}{% -name={\oe sophagus}, -description={canal from mouth to stomach}} -\end{verbatim} -but don't do \verb|\oe{}sophagus| as it will confuse -\ics{makefirstuc} (described -\ifmakedtx{in \autoref{sec:mfirstuc}}{\htmlref{later}{sec:mfirstuc}}) -and will produce \ifmakedtx{\oe{}}{oe}Sophagus instead of -\ifmakedtx{{\OE}}{OE}sophagus. \ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} @@ -1538,7 +1656,20 @@ option has been used). If omitted, the glossary title is used. \item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{style}}] This specifies which glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect -of the \pkgopt{style} option or \ics{glossarystyle}. +of the \pkgopt{style} package option or \ics{glossarystyle}. + +\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{numberedsection}}] This specifies +whether to use a numbered section for this glossary, overriding +the effect of the \pkgopt{numberedsection} package option. This +key has the same syntax as the \pkgopt{numberedsection} package +option, described \ifmakedtx{in \autoref{sec:pkgopts}}{\htmlref{earlier}{sec:pkgopts}}. + +\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{nonumberlist}}] Unlike the package option +of the same name, this key is a boolean key. If true (\verb|nonumberlist=true|) the numberlist +is suppressed for this glossary. If false (\verb|nonumberlist=false|) the numberlist is +displayed for this glossary. If no value is supplied, true is +assumed. + \end{description} \DescribeMacro{\glossarypreamble} @@ -1656,12 +1787,13 @@ the name of the glossary in which the acronyms should appear. If the \texttt{acronym}, otherwise it will be \texttt{main}. The acronyms can then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary entry. -(\textbf{Note:} since \cs{newacronym} sets \verb|type=\acronymtype|, +\begin{important}% +\textbf{Note:} since \cs{newacronym} sets \verb|type=\acronymtype|, if you want to load a file containing acronym definitions using \cs{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}, the optional argument \meta{type} will not have an effect unless you explicitly set the -type as \verb|type=\glsdefaulttype|. See \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:loadglsentries}}{\htmlref{earlier}{sec:loadglsentries} for details}.) - +type as \verb|type=\glsdefaulttype|. See \ifmakedtx{\autoref{sec:loadglsentries}}{\htmlref{earlier}{sec:loadglsentries} for details}. +\end{important} For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: \begin{verbatim} @@ -1695,18 +1827,33 @@ such as \cs{acrshort}, as they vary according to the definition of \Tableref{tab:acronymsettings} lists the package options and how the -\ics{newglossaryentry} keys are used to store \meta{long} (the long -form) and \meta{abbrv} (the short form). Note that the -\pkgopt{smallcaps} option redefines \ics{acronymfont} so that it sets -its argument using \cs{textsc} (so you should use lower case characters -in \meta{abbrv}) and the \pkgopt{smaller} option redefines -\cs{acronymfont} to use \cs{smaller}\footnote{\cs{smaller} is defined -in the \sty{relsize} package.}, otherwise \cs{acronymfont} simply -displays its argument in the surrounding font. Note also that if none -of the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{smaller}, -\pkgopt{dua}, \pkgopt{description} or \pkgopt{footnote} are used, -\cs{acronymfont} is not used, so changing the definition of -\cs{acronymfont} will have no effect under such circumstances. +\ics{newglossaryentry} keys are used to store \meta{long} (the long +form) and \meta{abbrv} (the short form). Note that the +\pkgopt{smallcaps} option redefines +\DescribeMacro{\acronymfont}\cs{acronymfont} so that it sets its +argument using \cs{textsc} (so you should use lower case characters in +\meta{abbrv}) and the \pkgopt{smaller} option redefines +\cs{acronymfont} to use \cs{smaller},\footnote{you will need to load a +package, such as \sty{relsize}, that defines \cs{smaller} if you use +this option.} otherwise \cs{acronymfont} simply displays its argument +in the surrounding font. Note also that if none of the package options +\pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{smaller}, \pkgopt{dua}, +\pkgopt{description} or \pkgopt{footnote} are used, \cs{acronymfont} is +not used, so changing the definition of \cs{acronymfont} will have no +effect under such circumstances. + +If you want to display the acronym in another font, for example, +emphasized, then use the \pkgopt{smaller} package option and +redefine \ics{acronymfont} to use the required font. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} +\end{verbatim} +Where \cs{acronymfont} is available, +\DescribeMacro{\firstacronymfont}\cs{firstacronymfont} is also +available. By default, this simply uses \cs{acronymfont}, but it +can be redefined to change the way the acronym is displayed on +first use. \begin{table}[htbp] \caption{Package options governing \cs{newacronym} and how the @@ -1795,7 +1942,7 @@ to change the way the link text is displayed. \item[\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{footnote}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} When these two package options are used together, the first use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] -\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long} +\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long} \\[10pt] while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] \cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] @@ -1809,7 +1956,7 @@ given order), the \sty{glossaries} package additionally implements the \ipkgopt[description]{sanitize}\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}|, so remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. -\item[dua]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} +\item[\pkgopt{dua}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} The \pkgopt{dua} package option always displays the expanded form and so may not be used with \pkgopt{footnote}, \pkgopt{smaller} or \pkgopt{smallcaps}. Both first use and subsequent use displays the @@ -1822,7 +1969,7 @@ If the \pkgopt{description} package option is also used, the \item[\pkgopt{description}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} This package option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] \cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} @@ -1832,7 +1979,7 @@ remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. \item[\pkgopt{footnote}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} This package option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long}\\[10pt] +\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long}\\[10pt] while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] \cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert} @@ -1844,7 +1991,7 @@ remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. \item[\pkgopt{smallcaps}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} If neither the \pkgopt{footnote} nor \pkgopt{description} options have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] \cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] where \cs{acronymfont} is set to \verb|\textsc{#1}|, so \meta{abbrv} @@ -1858,11 +2005,14 @@ remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. \item[\pkgopt{smaller}]\ifmakedtx{\mbox{}\par}{} If neither the \pkgopt{footnote} nor \pkgopt{description} options have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] \cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] where \cs{acronymfont} is set to \verb|{\smaller #1}|. +Remember to load a package that defines \ics{smaller} (such as +\isty{relsize}) if you want to use this option. + Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} package additionally implements the option \ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={symbol=false}|, so @@ -1874,7 +2024,6 @@ If none of the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{smaller}, then on first use the entry is displayed as:\\[10pt] \meta{long} (\meta{abbrv})\meta{insert}\\[10pt] while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] -\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] \meta{abbrv}\meta{insert} \end{description} @@ -1998,7 +2147,22 @@ list for that entry. Sub groups are separated using \cs{indexspace}. \item[listhypergroup] The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style is like \glostyle{listgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary -groups. +groups. The start of the glossary has a navigation panel to +each group that is present in the glossary. This requires an +additional run through \LaTeX\ to ensure the group information +is up-to-date. In the navigation panel, each group is separated +by \DescribeMacro{\glshypernavsep}\cs{glshypernavsep} which +defaults to a vertical bar with a space on either side. For example, +to simply have a space separating each group, do: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space} +\end{verbatim} + +Note that the hyper-navigation panel is now (as from version 1.14) +set inside the optional argument to \cs{item} instead of after it +to prevent a spurious space at the start. This can be changed +by redefining \ics{glossaryheader}, but note that this needs to +be done \emph{after} the glossary style has been set. \item[altlist] The \glostyle{altlist} style is like \glostyle{list} but the description is placed on the following line. @@ -2008,7 +2172,8 @@ but the description is placed on the following line. \item[altlisthypergroup] The \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} style is like \glostyle{altlistgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary -groups. +groups. The navigation panel is the same as that for +\glostyle{listhypergroup}, described above. \item[listdotted] This style uses the \envname{description} environment. Each entry starts with \verb|\item[]|, followed by the @@ -2119,6 +2284,28 @@ or using the \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the optional argument to \ics{printglossary} or using the command:\\[10pt] \DescribeMacro{\glossarystyle}\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{style-name}\\[10pt] +Note that if you use the \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the +optional argument to \ics{printglossary}, it will override any +previous style settings for the given glossary, so if, for example, +you do: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} +\printglossary[style=long] +\end{verbatim} +The new definition of \ics{glsgroupskip} will not have an affect +for this glossary, as \cs{glsgroupskip} is redefined by +\verb|style=long|. Likewise, \ics{glossarystyle} will also +override any previous style definitions, so, again: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} +\glossarystyle{long} +\end{verbatim} +will reset \cs{glsgroupskip} back to its default definition for the +named glossary style (\dq{long} in this case). If you want to +modify the styles, either use \ics{newglossarystyle} (described +in the next section) or make the modifications after +\ics{glossarystyle}. + \changes{1.03}{2007 July 4}{'glspostdescription added} All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the \glostyle{listdotted} style use the command @@ -2306,7 +2493,7 @@ The \sty{glossaries} package is supplied with the package \cs{makefirstuc}\marg{stuff}\\[10pt] which makes the first object of \meta{stuff} uppercase unless \meta{stuff} starts with a control -sequence followed by a group, in which case the first +sequence followed by a non-empty group, in which case the first object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples: \begin{itemize} \item \verb|\makefirstuc{abc}| produces Abc @@ -2322,9 +2509,13 @@ than \cs{emph}.) \item \verb|\makefirstuc{{\ae}bc}| produces {\AE}bc \end{itemize} -Note however that \verb|\makefirstuc{\ae{}bc}| produces \ae Bc since -the empty group following \cs{ae} is considered to be the argument -of \cs{ae} which is in fact not the case. +\begin{important} +In version 1.02 of \sty{mfirstuc}, a bug fix resulted in a change +in output if the first object is a control sequence followed by +an empty group. Prior to version 1.02, \verb|\makefirstuc{\ae{}bc}| +produced \ae Bc. However as from version 1.02, it now produces +\AE bc. +\end{important} Note also that \begin{verbatim} @@ -2348,6 +2539,17 @@ This is equivalent to \cs{expandafter}\cs{makefirstuc}\cs{expandafter}\marg{stuf \end{verbatim} produces: Abc. +If you want to use an alternative command to convert to uppercase, +for example \cs{MakeTextUppercase}\footnote{defined in the +\sty{textcase} package}, you can redefine the internal +command \cs{@gls@makefirstuc}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\@gls@makefirstuc}[1]{\MakeTextUppercase #1} +\end{verbatim} +(Remember that command names that contain the @ character must +either be placed in packages or be placed between \cs{makeatletter} +\cs{makeatother}.) + \ifmakedtx{}{\toTop} \StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.pdf Binary files differindex ef70c06fb7f..f125d355fc9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossaries.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.html index 74207fb56c1..77571dcf832 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.html @@ -26,6 +26,7 @@ package"> <H1 ALIGN="CENTER">Upgrading from the glossary package to the glossaries package</H1> <P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>Nicola L.C. Talbot</STRONG></P> +<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>17th June 2008</STRONG></P> <BR> <H2><A NAME="SECTION00010000000000000000"> @@ -34,42 +35,44 @@ Contents</A> <!--Table of Contents--> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html21" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html23" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00020000000000000000">1 Package Options</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html22" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html24" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00030000000000000000">2 Defining new glossary types</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html23" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html25" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00040000000000000000">3 \make<glossary name></A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html24" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html26" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00050000000000000000">4 Storing glossary information</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html25" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html27" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00060000000000000000">5 Adding an entry to the glossary</A> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html26" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html28" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00061000000000000000">5.1 \useglosentry</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html27" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html29" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00062000000000000000">5.2 \useGlosentry</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html28" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html30" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00063000000000000000">5.3 \gls</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html29" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html31" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00064000000000000000">5.4 \glossary</A> </UL> <BR> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html30" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html32" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00070000000000000000">6 Acronyms</A> <UL> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html31" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html33" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00071000000000000000">6.1 \acrln and \acrsh</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html32" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html34" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00072000000000000000">6.2 \ifacronymfirstuse</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html33" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html35" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00073000000000000000">6.3 \resetacronym and \unsetacronym</A> </UL> <BR> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html34" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html36" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00080000000000000000">7 Displaying the glossary</A> -<LI><A NAME="tex2html35" +<LI><A NAME="tex2html37" HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION00090000000000000000">8 Using makeindex</A> +<LI><A NAME="tex2html38" + HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#SECTION000100000000000000000">9 Troubleshooting</A> </UL> <!--End of Table of Contents--> <P> @@ -104,7 +107,7 @@ to the <TT>glossaries</TT> package options. <A NAME="tab:pkgopt"></A> <DIV ALIGN="CENTER"> -<A NAME="462"></A> +<A NAME="502"></A> <TABLE CELLPADDING=3> <CAPTION><STRONG>Table 1:</STRONG> Mappings from <TT>glossary</TT> to <TT>glossaries</TT> @@ -221,7 +224,7 @@ with in the preamble, and <P> -<TT><TT>\glossarystyle{<<I>new style list</I>>}</TT></TT> +<TT><TT>\glossarystyle{<<I>new style</I>>}</TT></TT> <P> immediately before <code>\printglossary[type=</code><<I>type</I>><code>]</code>, if the new glossary requires a different style to the main (default) @@ -229,7 +232,7 @@ glossary. <P> The <<I>style list</I>> optional argument can be converted to -<<I>new style list</I>> using the same mapping given in +<<I>new style</I>> using the same mapping given in Table <A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#tab:pkgopt">1</A>. <P> @@ -244,11 +247,18 @@ You will need to replace the above two lines with: </PRE> in the preamble, and <PRE> -\glossarystyle{style=longheader} +\glossarystyle{longheader} </PRE> immediately prior to displaying this glossary new type. <P> +Alternatively, you can specify the style using the <TT>style</TT> +key in the optional argument of <TT>\printglossary</TT>. For example: +<PRE> +\printglossary[type=notation,style=longheader] +</PRE> + +<P> Note that the glossary title is no longer specified using <TT>\</TT><<I>glossary-type</I>><TT>name</TT> (except for <TT>\glossaryname</TT> and <TT>\acronymname</TT>) but is instead specified in the <<I>title</I>> @@ -289,8 +299,8 @@ With the old <TT>glossary</TT> package you could optionally store glossary information for later use, or you could simply use <TT>\glossary</TT> whenever you wanted to add information to the glossary. With the new <TT>glossaries</TT> package, the latter option is no longer -available<A NAME="tex2html2" - HREF="#foot464"><SUP>1</SUP></A>. If +available.<A NAME="tex2html2" + HREF="#foot504"><SUP>1</SUP></A> If you have stored all the glossary information using <TT>\storeglosentry</TT>, then you will need to convert these commands into the equivalent <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT>. If you haven't used @@ -344,9 +354,6 @@ description={The cardinality of the set $\mathcal{S}$}} <P> The <TT>format</TT> and <TT>number</TT> keys available in <TT>\storeglosentry</TT> are not available with <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT>. -Note also that the <TT>glossary</TT> package allowed you to use -<TT>\storeglosentry</TT> in the document, but <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> -may only be used in the preamble. <P> @@ -408,7 +415,7 @@ Any occurrences if this command will need to be replaced with <TT><TT>\glslink[<<I>new options</I>>]{<<I>label</I>>}{<<I>text</I>>}</TT></TT> <P> The mapping from <<I>old options</I>> to <<I>new options</I>> is -the same as that given in section <A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#sec:useglosentry">5.1</A> above. +the same as that given <A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#sec:useglosentry">above</A>. <P> @@ -420,7 +427,9 @@ the same as that given in section <A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#sec:use Both the <TT>glossary</TT> and the <TT>glossaries</TT> packages define the command <TT>\gls</TT>. In this case, the only thing you need to change is the <TT>number</TT> key in the optional argument -to <TT>counter</TT>. +to <TT>counter</TT>. Note that the new form of <TT>\gls</TT> also takes +a final optional argument which can be used to insert text into the +automatically generated text. <P> @@ -431,13 +440,13 @@ to <TT>counter</TT>. <P> When using the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, you should not use <TT>\glossary</TT> directly.<A NAME="tex2html3" - HREF="#foot469"><SUP>2</SUP></A> If, with the old + HREF="#foot511"><SUP>2</SUP></A> If, with the old package, you have opted to explicitly use <TT>\glossary</TT> instead of storing the glossary information with <TT>\storeglosentry</TT>, then converting from <TT>glossary</TT> to <TT>glossaries</TT> will be more time-consuming, although in the end, I hope you will see the benefits!<A NAME="tex2html4" - HREF="#foot470"><SUP>3</SUP></A> If + HREF="#foot512"><SUP>3</SUP></A> If you have used <TT>\glossary</TT> with the old glossary package, you will instead need to define the relevant glossary terms using <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> and reference the terms using <TT>\glslink</TT>, @@ -462,7 +471,7 @@ In the <TT>glossary</TT> package, acronyms were treated differently to glossary entries. This resulted in inconsistencies and sprawling unmaintainable code. The new <TT>glossaries</TT> package treats acronyms in exactly the same way as normal glossary terms. In fact, -in the <TT>glossaries</TT> package: +in the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, the default definition of: <P> <TT><TT>\newacronym[<<I>options</I>>]{<<I>label</I>>}{<<I>abbrv</I>>}{<<I>long</I>>}</TT></TT> @@ -483,20 +492,10 @@ firstplural={<<I>long</I>>s (<<I>abbrv</I>>s)}, <P> This is different to the <TT>glossary</TT> package which set the <TT>name</TT> key to <<I>long</I>> (<<I>abbrv</I>>) and allowed you -to set a description using the <TT>description</TT> key. If you want -your document to remain like this, you can redefine <TT>\newacronym</TT> -as follows: -<PRE> -\renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% -\newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype, -name={#4 (#3)}, -text={#3}, -first={#4 (#3)}, -plural={#3s}, -firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} -</PRE> -The <TT>description</TT> key will then need to be entered using the -optional argument. +to set a description using the <TT>description</TT> key. If you +still want to do this, you can use the <TT>description</TT> package +option, and use the <TT>description</TT> key in the +optional argument of <TT>\newacronym</TT>. <P> For example, if your document originally had the following: @@ -504,8 +503,12 @@ For example, if your document originally had the following: \newacronym{SVM}{Support Vector Machine}{description=Statistical pattern recognition technique} </PRE> -Then you would need to redefine <TT>\newacronym</TT> as shown above, -and change the above to: +Then you would need to load the <TT>glossaries</TT> package using the +<TT>description</TT> package option, for example: +<PRE> +\usepackage[description]{glossaries} +</PRE> +and change the acronym definition to: <PRE> \newacronym[description=Statistical pattern recognition technique]{svm}{SVM}{Support Vector Machine} @@ -515,6 +518,39 @@ You will also need to replace all occurrences of <TT>\SVM</TT> with <PRE> \newcommand{\SVM}{\gls{svm}} </PRE> +Remember that generally LaTeX ignores all spaces following command +names that consist of a backslash followed by letters! For example, +using the above definition of <TT>\SVM</TT>, the following will ignore +the space after <TT>\SVM</TT>: +<PRE> +The \SVM is a statistical pattern recognition technique. +</PRE> +Instead, you need to explicitly insert a space: +<PRE> +The \SVM\ is a statistical pattern recognition technique. +</PRE> +However, <code>\SVM['s]</code> is equivalent to <code>\gls{svm}['s]</code>, +so you can do, for example: +<PRE> +The \SVM['s] parameters are obtained via optimisation techniques. +</PRE> + +<P> +The <TT>xspace</TT> package provides the command <TT>\xspace</TT> which can +be used to insert a space after the command name if required. Some +people prefer to use this at the end of the command definition so +that they don't need to remember to insert an explicit space. +For example, if we use the <TT>xspace</TT> package, we could define +<TT>\SVM</TT> as follows: +<PRE> +\newcommand{\SVM}{\gls{svm}\xspace} +</PRE> +so now the following will have a space before the word "is": +<PRE> +The \SVM is a statistical pattern recognition technique. +</PRE> +However, you can no longer do <code>\SVM['s]</code>, as the <TT>\xspace</TT> is +now in the way. <P> If you have used <TT>\useacronym</TT> instead of <TT>\</TT><<I>acr-name</I>>, @@ -542,7 +578,9 @@ be replaced with <TT>\Gls{<<I>label</I>>}</TT>. In the <TT>glossary</TT> package, it is possible to produce the long and short forms of an acronym without adding an entry to the glossary using <TT>\acrln</TT> and <TT>\acrsh</TT>. With the -<TT>glossaries</TT> package, you can replace +<TT>glossaries</TT> package (provided you defined the acronym using +<TT>\newacronym</TT> and provided you haven't redefined <TT>\newacronym</TT>) +you can replace <P> <TT><TT>\acrsh{<<I>acr-name</I>>}</TT></TT> @@ -550,44 +588,26 @@ the glossary using <TT>\acrln</TT> and <TT>\acrsh</TT>. With the with <P> -<TT><TT>\glsentrytext{<<I>label</I>>}</TT></TT> +<TT><TT>\acrshort{<<I>label</I>>}</TT></TT> <P> -However the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides no direct equivalent -of <TT>\acrln</TT>. Instead it provides <TT>\glsentryfirst</TT> which -produces the ``first use'' text without adding an entry to the -glossary, or affecting the first use flag. +and you can replace <P> -Alternatively, if you haven't changed the definition of -<TT>\newacronym</TT>, the long form by itself can be obtained using -<TT>\glsentrydesc</TT>, since by default the <TT>description</TT> key is -set to the long form (but read the notes in the <TT>glossaries</TT> -manual regarding the <TT>sanitize</TT> package option). +<TT><TT>\acrln{<<I>acr-name</I>>}</TT></TT> +<P> +with <P> -If you want to be able to set a description, and be able to -independently access the description, the long form and the -short form, you can redefine <TT>\newacronym</TT> so that it uses -the <TT>symbol</TT> key and use <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT> -so that it uses this value on first use, as follows: -<PRE> -\renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{\newglossaryentry{#2}{% -name={#4 (#3)}, -text={#3}, -first={#4}, -symbol={#3}, -}} -\defglsdisplayfirst{\acronymtype}{##1 (##3)##4} -</PRE> -As before, you can access the short name via -<TT>\glsentrytext{<<I>label</I>>}</TT>, but you can now access just the long -form via <TT>\glsentryfirst{<<I>label</I>>}</TT> and the description via -<TT>\glsentrydesc{<<I>label</I>>}</TT>. +<TT><TT>\acrlong{<<I>label</I>>}</TT></TT> +<P> +The <TT>glossaries</TT> package also provides the related commands +<TT>\acrshortpl</TT> (plural short form) and <TT>\acrlongpl</TT> (plural long +form) as well as upper case variations. <P> See -the section ``Using -glossary entries in the text'' of the <TT>glossaries</TT> +the section "Using +glossary entries in the text" of the <TT>glossaries</TT> manual for further details of how to use these commands. <P> @@ -726,16 +746,28 @@ you will need to use the <TT>makeglossaries</TT> Perl script instead. <P> + +<H1><A NAME="SECTION000100000000000000000"> +9 Troubleshooting</A> +</H1> + +<P> +Please check the <A NAME="tex2html5" + HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html">FAQ</A> +for the <TT>glossaries</TT> package if you have any +problems. + +<P> <BR><HR><H4>Footnotes</H4> <DL> -<DT><A NAME="foot464">... -available</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot504">... +available.</A><A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#tex2html2"><SUP>1</SUP></A></DT> <DD>mainly because having a key value list in <TT>\glossary</TT> caused problems, but it also helps consistency. </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot469">... directly.</A><A +<DT><A NAME="foot511">... directly.</A><A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#tex2html3"><SUP>2</SUP></A></DT> <DD>This is because <TT>\glossary</TT> requires the argument to be in a specific format and doesn't use the @@ -747,7 +779,7 @@ recommended. If you persist in using <TT>\glossary</TT> with the new package, don't complain if things go wrong! </DD> -<DT><A NAME="foot470">... +<DT><A NAME="foot512">... benefits!</A><A HREF="glossary2glossaries.html#tex2html4"><SUP>3</SUP></A></DT> <DD>From the user's point of view, using <TT>\glossary</TT> diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.pdf Binary files differindex 275dcac7391..f72177a7152 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.tex index f811c671f11..12b63f036fc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/glossary2glossaries.tex @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ \title{Upgrading from the glossary package to the glossaries package} \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot} +\date{17th June 2008} \newcommand*{\meta}[1]{\textnormal{\textless\emph{#1}\textgreater}} \newcommand*{\marg}[1]{\texttt{\char`\{\meta{#1}\char`\}}} @@ -19,6 +20,9 @@ package} %\begin{latexonly} \newcommand*{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\key}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\pkgopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\dq}[1]{``#1''} \newsavebox\waybox \newenvironment{oldway}{\begin{lrbox}{\waybox} @@ -42,6 +46,9 @@ package} \newenvironment{newway}{\par\begin{ttfamily}}{\end{ttfamily}\par} \newcommand{\sty}[1]{\texttt{#1}} \renewcommand{\LaTeX}{LaTeX} +\newcommand*{\key}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand*{\pkgopt}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand*{\dq}[1]{"#1"} \end{htmlonly} \begin{document} @@ -117,14 +124,14 @@ with \end{newway}% in the preamble, and \begin{newway} -\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{new style list} +\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{new style} \end{newway}% immediately before \verb|\printglossary[type=|\meta{type}\verb|]|, if the new glossary requires a different style to the main (default) glossary. The \meta{style list} optional argument can be converted to -\meta{new style list} using the same mapping given in +\meta{new style} using the same mapping given in Table~\ref{tab:pkgopt}. For example, if your document contains the following: @@ -138,17 +145,23 @@ You will need to replace the above two lines with: \end{verbatim} in the preamble, and \begin{verbatim} -\glossarystyle{style=longheader} +\glossarystyle{longheader} \end{verbatim} immediately prior to displaying this glossary new type. +Alternatively, you can specify the style using the \key{style} +key in the optional argument of \cs{printglossary}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\printglossary[type=notation,style=longheader] +\end{verbatim} + Note that the glossary title is no longer specified using \cs{}\meta{glossary-type}\texttt{name} (except for \cs{glossaryname} and \cs{acronymname}) but is instead specified in the \meta{title} argument of \cs{newglossary}. The short title which is specified in the \sty{glossary} package by the command \cs{short}\meta{glossary-name}\texttt{name} is now specified -using the \texttt{toctitle} key in the optional argument to +using the \key{toctitle} key in the optional argument to \cs{printglossary}. \section{\cs{make}\meta{glossary name}} @@ -172,8 +185,8 @@ With the old \sty{glossary} package you could optionally store glossary information for later use, or you could simply use \cs{glossary} whenever you wanted to add information to the glossary. With the new \sty{glossaries} package, the latter option is no longer -available\footnote{mainly because having a key value list in -\cs{glossary} caused problems, but it also helps consistency.}. If +available.\footnote{mainly because having a key value list in +\cs{glossary} caused problems, but it also helps consistency.} If you have stored all the glossary information using \cs{storeglosentry}, then you will need to convert these commands into the equivalent \cs{newglossaryentry}. If you haven't used @@ -217,11 +230,8 @@ then you will need to replace it with: description={The cardinality of the set $\mathcal{S}$}} \end{verbatim} -The \texttt{format} and \texttt{number} keys available in +The \key{format} and \key{number} keys available in \cs{storeglosentry} are not available with \cs{newglossaryentry}. -Note also that the \sty{glossary} package allowed you to use -\cs{storeglosentry} in the document, but \cs{newglossaryentry} -may only be used in the preamble. \section{Adding an entry to the glossary} @@ -246,7 +256,7 @@ Any occurrences of this command will need to be replaced with \begin{newway} \cs{glsadd}\oarg{new options}\marg{label} \end{newway}% -The \texttt{format} key in \meta{old options} remains the same +The \key{format} key in \meta{old options} remains the same in \meta{new options}, the \texttt{number=}\meta{counter name} key in \meta{old options} should be replaced with\linebreak \texttt{counter=}\meta{counter name} in \meta{new options}. @@ -263,14 +273,17 @@ Any occurrences if this command will need to be replaced with \cs{glslink}\oarg{new options}\marg{label}\marg{text} \end{newway}% The mapping from \meta{old options} to \meta{new options} is -the same as that given in section~\ref{sec:useglosentry} above. +the same as that given \latexhtml{section~\ref{sec:useglosentry} +above}{\htmlref{above}{sec:useglosentry}}. \subsection{\cs{gls}} Both the \sty{glossary} and the \sty{glossaries} packages define the command \cs{gls}. In this case, the only thing you need to -change is the \texttt{number} key in the optional argument -to \texttt{counter}. +change is the \key{number} key in the optional argument +to \key{counter}. Note that the new form of \cs{gls} also takes +a final optional argument which can be used to insert text into the +automatically generated text. \subsection{\cs{glossary}} @@ -310,7 +323,7 @@ In the \sty{glossary} package, acronyms were treated differently to glossary entries. This resulted in inconsistencies and sprawling unmaintainable code. The new \sty{glossaries} package treats acronyms in exactly the same way as normal glossary terms. In fact, -in the \sty{glossaries} package: +in the \sty{glossaries} package, the default definition of: \begin{newway} \cs{newacronym}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long} \end{newway} @@ -327,29 +340,23 @@ firstplural=\{\meta{long}s (\meta{abbrv}s)\}, \end{newway} This is different to the \sty{glossary} package which set the -\texttt{name} key to \meta{long} (\meta{abbrv}) and allowed you -to set a description using the \texttt{description} key. If you want -your document to remain like this, you can redefine \cs{newacronym} -as follows: -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% -\newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype, -name={#4 (#3)}, -text={#3}, -first={#4 (#3)}, -plural={#3s}, -firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}} -\end{verbatim} -The \texttt{description} key will then need to be entered using the -optional argument. +\key{name} key to \meta{long} (\meta{abbrv}) and allowed you +to set a description using the \key{description} key. If you +still want to do this, you can use the \pkgopt{description} package +option, and use the \key{description} key in the +optional argument of \cs{newacronym}. For example, if your document originally had the following: \begin{verbatim} \newacronym{SVM}{Support Vector Machine}{description=Statistical pattern recognition technique} \end{verbatim} -Then you would need to redefine \cs{newacronym} as shown above, -and change the above to: +Then you would need to load the \sty{glossaries} package using the +\pkgopt{description} package option, for example: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[description]{glossaries} +\end{verbatim} +and change the acronym definition to: \begin{verbatim} \newacronym[description=Statistical pattern recognition technique]{svm}{SVM}{Support Vector Machine} @@ -359,6 +366,38 @@ You will also need to replace all occurrences of \cs{SVM} with \begin{verbatim} \newcommand{\SVM}{\gls{svm}} \end{verbatim} +Remember that generally \LaTeX\ ignores all spaces following command +names that consist of a backslash followed by letters! For example, +using the above definition of \cs{SVM}, the following will ignore +the space after \cs{SVM}: +\begin{verbatim} +The \SVM is a statistical pattern recognition technique. +\end{verbatim} +Instead, you need to explicitly insert a space: +\begin{verbatim} +The \SVM\ is a statistical pattern recognition technique. +\end{verbatim} +However, \verb|\SVM['s]| is equivalent to \verb|\gls{svm}['s]|, +so you can do, for example: +\begin{verbatim} +The \SVM['s] parameters are obtained via optimisation techniques. +\end{verbatim} + +The \sty{xspace} package provides the command \cs{xspace} which can +be used to insert a space after the command name if required. Some +people prefer to use this at the end of the command definition so +that they don't need to remember to insert an explicit space. +For example, if we use the \sty{xspace} package, we could define +\cs{SVM} as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\SVM}{\gls{svm}\xspace} +\end{verbatim} +so now the following will have a space before the word \dq{is}: +\begin{verbatim} +The \SVM is a statistical pattern recognition technique. +\end{verbatim} +However, you can no longer do \verb|\SVM['s]|, as the \cs{xspace} is +now in the way. If you have used \cs{useacronym} instead of \cs{}\meta{acr-name}, then you will need to replace all occurrences of @@ -378,47 +417,31 @@ be replaced with \cs{Gls}\marg{label}. In the \sty{glossary} package, it is possible to produce the long and short forms of an acronym without adding an entry to the glossary using \cs{acrln} and \cs{acrsh}. With the -\sty{glossaries} package, you can replace +\sty{glossaries} package (provided you defined the acronym using +\cs{newacronym} and provided you haven't redefined \cs{newacronym}) +you can replace \begin{oldway} \cs{acrsh}\marg{acr-name} \end{oldway}% with \begin{newway} -\cs{glsentrytext}\marg{label} +\cs{acrshort}\marg{label} \end{newway}% -However the \sty{glossaries} package provides no direct equivalent -of \cs{acrln}. Instead it provides \cs{glsentryfirst} which -produces the ``first use'' text without adding an entry to the -glossary, or affecting the first use flag. - -Alternatively, if you haven't changed the definition of -\cs{newacronym}, the long form by itself can be obtained using -\cs{glsentrydesc}, since by default the \texttt{description} key is -set to the long form (but read the notes in the \sty{glossaries} -manual regarding the \texttt{sanitize} package option). - -If you want to be able to set a description, and be able to -independently access the description, the long form and the -short form, you can redefine \cs{newacronym} so that it uses -the \texttt{symbol} key and use \cs{defglsdisplayfirst} -so that it uses this value on first use, as follows: -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{\newglossaryentry{#2}{% -name={#4 (#3)}, -text={#3}, -first={#4}, -symbol={#3}, -}} -\defglsdisplayfirst{\acronymtype}{##1 (##3)##4} -\end{verbatim} -As before, you can access the short name via -\cs{glsentrytext}\marg{label}, but you can now access just the long -form via \cs{glsentryfirst}\marg{label} and the description via -\cs{glsentrydesc}\marg{label}. +and you can replace +\begin{oldway} +\cs{acrln}\marg{acr-name} +\end{oldway}% +with +\begin{newway} +\cs{acrlong}\marg{label} +\end{newway}% +The \sty{glossaries} package also provides the related commands +\cs{acrshortpl} (plural short form) and \cs{acrlongpl} (plural long +form) as well as upper case variations. See -\latexhtml{section~\ref*{sec:code:glslink} (}{the section }``Using -glossary entries in the text''\latex{)} of the \sty{glossaries} +\latexhtml{section~\ref*{sec:code:glslink} (}{the section }\dq{Using +glossary entries in the text}\latex{)} of the \sty{glossaries} manual for further details of how to use these commands. \subsection{\cs{ifacronymfirstuse}} @@ -500,14 +523,14 @@ The \sty{glossary} package allows you to specify a short title (for the table of contents and page header) by defining a command of the form \cs{short}\meta{glossary-type}\texttt{name}. The \sty{glossaries} package doesn't do this, but instead provides -the \texttt{toctitle} key which can be used in the optional +the \key{toctitle} key which can be used in the optional argument to \cs{printglossary}. For example, if you have created a new glossary type called \texttt{notation}, and you had defined \begin{verbatim} \newcommand{\shortnotationname}{Notation} \end{verbatim} -then you would need to use the \texttt{toctitle} key: +then you would need to use the \key{toctitle} key: \begin{verbatim} \printglossary[type=notation,toctitle=Notation] \end{verbatim} @@ -526,4 +549,10 @@ Remember also, that if you used the \texttt{makeglos} Perl script, you will need to use the \texttt{makeglossaries} Perl script instead. +\section{Troubleshooting} + +Please check the \htmladdnormallinkfoot{FAQ}{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html} +for the \sty{glossaries} package if you have any +problems. + \end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/minimalgls.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/minimalgls.tex index eeaf583892d..1f97e1fffec 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/minimalgls.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/minimalgls.tex @@ -3,7 +3,9 @@ % desired, and add the relevant package options to % both the class file and the glossaries package. % Change the sample glossary entry and acronym if - % required. + % required. If the problem occurs with an additional + % glossary, add in the relevant \newglossary command + % and a sample entry. % % Only add extra packages or commands if they % contribute to whatever problem you are trying to @@ -22,17 +24,23 @@ \listfiles %\usepackage{glossaries} % acronym will go in main glossary -\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} % make a separate list of acronyms + \usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} % make a separate list of acronyms \makeglossaries \newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample}, description={a sample entry}} -\newacronym{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} +% This contrived acronym has non-standard plural forms. +% These are specified in the optional argument. +\newacronym[\glsshortpluralkey=cas,\glslongpluralkey=contrived +acronyms]{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} \begin{document} -A \gls{sample} entry and \gls{aca}. +A \gls{sample} entry and \gls{aca}. Second use: \gls{aca}. + +Plurals: \glspl{sample}. Reset acronym\glsreset{aca}. +First use: \glspl{aca}. Second use: \glspl{aca}. \printglossaries \end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx index 53444736371..4422a782e6f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx @@ -15,12 +15,13 @@ % -author "Nicola Talbot" % -dir "source" % -setambles "glossaries\.perl=>\nopreamble\nopostamble" +% -setambles ".*\.tex=>\nopreamble\nopostamble" % -comment "glossaries\.perl" % -comment ".*\.tex" % -doc "glossaries-manual.tex" % -codetitle "Documented Code" % glossaries -% Created on 2008/5/13 11:33 +% Created on 2008/6/18 16:44 %\fi %\iffalse %<*package> @@ -71,7 +72,7 @@ \makeatother \RecordChanges \PageIndex -\CheckSum{5110} +\CheckSum{5121} \CodelineNumbered \newcommand*{\termdef}[1]{\emph{#1}\iterm{#1}} \newcommand*{\term}[1]{#1\iterm{#1}} @@ -79,6 +80,18 @@ \newcommand{\dq}[1]{``#1''} \newcommand*{\tableref}[1]{\hyperref[#1]{table~\ref*{#1}}} \newcommand*{\Tableref}[1]{\hyperref[#1]{Table~\ref*{#1}}} +\newlength\boxlength +\newsavebox\importantbox +\newenvironment{important}{% +\setlength{\fboxrule}{4pt}% +\setlength\boxlength{\linewidth}% +\addtolength\boxlength{-2\fboxsep}% +\addtolength\boxlength{-2\fboxrule}% +\begin{lrbox}{\importantbox}% +\begin{minipage}{\boxlength}% +}{\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}% +\par\vskip10pt\noindent +\fcolorbox{red}{white}{\usebox{\importantbox}}\par\vskip10pt} @@ -111,7 +124,7 @@ %\MakeShortVerb{"} %\DeleteShortVerb{\|} % -% \title{glossaries.sty v 1.13: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries} +% \title{glossaries.sty v 1.14: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries} % \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] %School of Computing Sciences\\ %University of East Anglia\\ @@ -119,7 +132,7 @@ %NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\ %\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}} % -% \date{12th May 2008} +% \date{18th June 2008} % \maketitle %\tableofcontents % @@ -145,6 +158,7 @@ %code for the \sty{mfirstuc} package. % %\subsection{Multi-Lingual Support} +%\label{sec:languages} % %As from version 1.08, the \sty{glossaries} package now has %limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent @@ -153,7 +167,15 @@ %However you must load \isty{babel} \emph{before} %\sty{glossaries} to enable this. Note that if \isty{babel} is loaded %and the \isty{translator} package is detected on \TeX's path, then the -%\isty{translator} package will be loaded automatically. +%\isty{translator} package will be loaded automatically, however, +%it may not pick up on the required languages, so if the predefined +%text is not translated, you may need to explicitly load the +%\isty{translator} package with the required languages. For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\usepackage[spanish]{babel} +%\usepackage[spanish]{translator} +%\usepackage{glossaries} +%\end{verbatim} % %If you want to use \isty{ngerman} or \isty{german} instead %of \isty{babel}, you will need to include the \isty{translator} package @@ -277,13 +299,103 @@ % %The \sty{glossaries} package comes with a minimal file called %\texttt{minimalgls.tex} which can be used for testing. This -%should be located in \texttt{texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/}. Further -%information on debugging \LaTeX\ code is available at +%should be located in \texttt{texmf/doc/latex/glossaries/samples/}. +%Further information on debugging \LaTeX\ code is available at %\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/}. % -%There is a list of frequently asked questions for the -%\sty{glossaries} package available at -%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html}. +%Below is a list of the most frequently asked questions. For +%other queries, consult the \sty{glossaries} FAQ at +%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html}. +% +%\begin{enumerate} +%\item I've used the \pkgopt{smallcaps} option, but the acronyms +%are displayed in normal sized upper case letters. +% +%The \pkgopt{smallcaps} package option uses \cs{textsc} to typeset +%the acronyms. This command converts lower case letters to small +%capitals, while upper case letters remain their usual size. Therefore +%you need to specify the acronym in lower case letters. +% +%\item How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in? +% +%The easiest way to do this is to specify the \pkgopt{smaller} package +%option and redefine \cs{acronymfont} to use the required typesetting +%command. For example, suppose you would like the acronyms displayed in +%a sans-serif font, then you can do: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +%\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +%\end{verbatim} +% +%\item How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in +%on first use? +% +%The easiest way to do this is to specify the \pkgopt{smaller} package +%option and redefine \cs{firstacronymfont} to use the required +%command. Note that if you don't want the acronym on subsequent use +%to use \cs{smaller}, you will also need to redefine \cs{acronymfont}, +%as above. For example to make the acronym emphasized on first use, +%but use the surrounding font for subsequent use, you can do: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +%\renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} +%\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{#1} +%\end{verbatim} +% +%\item I don't have Perl installed, do I have to use +%\appname{makeglossaries}? +% +%Read \autoref{sec:makeglossaries}. +% +% +%\item I'm used to using the \sty{glossary} package: are there any +%instructions on migrating from the \isty{glossary} package to the +%\sty{glossaries} package? +% +%Read the file \texttt{glossary2glossaries.pdf} which should be available from the +%same location as this document. +% +%\item I'm using \isty{babel} but the fixed names haven't been +%translated. +% +%The \sty{glossaries} package currently only supports the following +%languages: Danish, Dutch, English, French, German, Irish, Italian, +%Hungarian, Polish and Spanish. If you want to add another language, +%send me the translations, and I'll add them to the next version. +% +%If you are using one of the above languages, but the text hasn't been +%translated, try adding the \isty{translator} package with the +%required languages explicitly (before you load the \sty{glossaries} +%package). For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} +%\usepackage[ngerman]{translator} +%\usepackage{glossaries} +%\end{verbatim} +%Alternatively, you may be able to add the language as a global option +%to the class file. Check the \sty{translator} package documentation for +%further details. +% +%\item My glossaries haven't appeared. +% +%Remember to do the following: +%\begin{itemize} +%\item Add \ics{makeglossaries} to the document preamble. +% +%\item Use either \ics{printglossary} for each glossary that has +%been defined or \ics{printglossaries}. +% +%\item Use \ics{gls}, \ics{Gls}, \ics{GLS}, \ics{glspl}, \ics{Glspl}, +%\ics{GLSpl}, \ics{glslink}, \ics{glsadd} or \ics{glsaddall} in the +%document. +% +%\item Run \LaTeX\ on your document, then run \appname{makeglossaries}, +%then run \LaTeX\ on your document again. If you want the glossaries +%to appear in the table of contents, you will need an extra \LaTeX\ +%run. +%\end{itemize} +%\end{enumerate} +% %\section{A Quick Guide For The Impatient} %\label{sec:quick} % @@ -568,7 +680,7 @@ % %\item Entries can be added to the glossary without producing %any text using \ics{glsadd}\marg{label} or -%\ics{glsaddall}. These commands also taken an optional +%\ics{glsaddall}. These commands also take an optional %argument where you can specify the format. For example %\begin{verbatim} %\glsadd[format=hyperbf]{singmtx} @@ -682,6 +794,7 @@ % \changes{1.02}{2007 May 25}{added overview section} % %\subsection{Package Options} +%\label{sec:pkgopts} % %The \sty{glossaries} package options are as follows: %\begin{description} @@ -751,6 +864,23 @@ %The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}. %\end{verbatim} % +%As from version 1.14, you can add a prefix to the label by +%redefining \DescribeMacro{\glsautoprefix}\cs{glsautoprefix}. +%For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{glo:} +%\end{verbatim} +%will add \texttt{glo:} to the automatically generated label, so +%you can then, for example, refer to the list of acronyms as follows: +%\begin{verbatim} +%The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{glo:\acronymtype}. +%\end{verbatim} +%Or, if you are undecided on a prefix: +%\begin{verbatim} +%The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\glsautoprefix\acronymtype}. +%\end{verbatim} +% +% %\item[\pkgopt{style}] This is a \meta{key}=\meta{value} option. Its %value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined %glossary styles are listed in \autoref{sec:styles}. @@ -776,6 +906,7 @@ %symbol=true}]{glossaries} %\end{verbatim} % +%\begin{important}% %\textbf{Note}: this sanitization only applies to the \gloskey{name}, %\gloskey{description} and \gloskey{symbol} keys. It doesn't apply %to any of the other keys (except the \gloskey{sort} key which is @@ -784,6 +915,7 @@ %Since the value of the \gloskey{text} key is obtained from the %\gloskey{name} key, you will still need to protect fragile commands %in the \gloskey{name} key if you don't use the \gloskey{text} key. +%\end{important} % %\item[\pkgopt{description}] This option changes the definition of %\ics{newacronym} to allow a description. See \autoref{sec:acronyms} for further details. @@ -880,6 +1012,7 @@ %from the \gloskey{plural} key, if the \gloskey{first} key is omitted, %or by appending \ics{glspluralsuffix} to the value of the %\gloskey{first} field, if the \gloskey{first} field is present. +% %\textbf{Note:} prior to version 1.13, the default value of %\gloskey{firstplural} was always taken by appending \dq{s} to the %\gloskey{first} key, which meant that you had to specify both @@ -916,22 +1049,7 @@ %\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite}, %description={select group or class}} %\end{verbatim} -%Similarly, commands such as \cs{ae} and \cs{oe} should either be placed -%inside a group or followed by a space. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\newglossaryentry{oesophagus}{% -%name={{\oe}sophagus}, -%description={canal from mouth to stomach}} -%\end{verbatim} -%The following is also fine: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\newglossaryentry{oesophagus}{% -%name={\oe sophagus}, -%description={canal from mouth to stomach}} -%\end{verbatim} -%but don't do \verb|\oe{}sophagus| as it will confuse -%\ics{makefirstuc} (described -%in \autoref{sec:mfirstuc}) and will produce \oe{}Sophagus instead of {\OE}sophagus. +% % %\subsubsection{Plurals} %You may have noticed from above that you can specify the plural form @@ -1485,7 +1603,19 @@ % %\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{style}}] This specifies which %glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect -%of the \pkgopt{style} option or \ics{glossarystyle}. +%of the \pkgopt{style} package option or \ics{glossarystyle}. +% +%\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{numberedsection}}] This specifies +%whether to use a numbered section for this glossary, overriding +%the effect of the \pkgopt{numberedsection} package option. This +%key has the same syntax as the \pkgopt{numberedsection} package +%option, described in \autoref{sec:pkgopts}. +%\item[{\gloskey[printglossary]{nonumberlist}}] Unlike the package option +%of the same name, this key is a boolean key. If true (\verb|nonumberlist=true|) the numberlist +%is suppressed for this glossary. If false (\verb|nonumberlist=false|) the numberlist is +%displayed for this glossary. If no value is supplied, true is +%assumed. +% %\end{description} % %\DescribeMacro{\glossarypreamble} @@ -1598,11 +1728,12 @@ %\texttt{acronym}, otherwise it will be \texttt{main}. The acronyms can %then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary entry. % -%(\textbf{Note:} since \cs{newacronym} sets \verb|type=\acronymtype|, +%\begin{important}% +%\textbf{Note:} since \cs{newacronym} sets \verb|type=\acronymtype|, %if you want to load a file containing acronym definitions using %\cs{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}, the optional argument %\meta{type} will not have an effect unless you explicitly set the -%type as \verb|type=\glsdefaulttype|. See \autoref{sec:loadglsentries}.) +%type as \verb|type=\glsdefaulttype|. See \autoref{sec:loadglsentries}.\end{important} % %For example, the following defines the acronym IDN: %\begin{verbatim} @@ -1635,18 +1766,33 @@ % % %\Tableref{tab:acronymsettings} lists the package options and how the -%\ics{newglossaryentry} keys are used to store \meta{long} (the long -%form) and \meta{abbrv} (the short form). Note that the -%\pkgopt{smallcaps} option redefines \ics{acronymfont} so that it sets -%its argument using \cs{textsc} (so you should use lower case characters -%in \meta{abbrv}) and the \pkgopt{smaller} option redefines -%\cs{acronymfont} to use \cs{smaller}\footnote{\cs{smaller} is defined -%in the \sty{relsize} package.}, otherwise \cs{acronymfont} simply -%displays its argument in the surrounding font. Note also that if none -%of the package options \pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{smaller}, -%\pkgopt{dua}, \pkgopt{description} or \pkgopt{footnote} are used, -%\cs{acronymfont} is not used, so changing the definition of -%\cs{acronymfont} will have no effect under such circumstances. +%\ics{newglossaryentry} keys are used to store \meta{long} (the long +%form) and \meta{abbrv} (the short form). Note that the +%\pkgopt{smallcaps} option redefines +%\DescribeMacro{\acronymfont}\cs{acronymfont} so that it sets its +%argument using \cs{textsc} (so you should use lower case characters in +%\meta{abbrv}) and the \pkgopt{smaller} option redefines +%\cs{acronymfont} to use \cs{smaller},\footnote{you will need to load a +%package, such as \sty{relsize}, that defines \cs{smaller} if you use +%this option.} otherwise \cs{acronymfont} simply displays its argument +%in the surrounding font. Note also that if none of the package options +%\pkgopt{smallcaps}, \pkgopt{smaller}, \pkgopt{dua}, +%\pkgopt{description} or \pkgopt{footnote} are used, \cs{acronymfont} is +%not used, so changing the definition of \cs{acronymfont} will have no +%effect under such circumstances. +% +%If you want to display the acronym in another font, for example, +%emphasized, then use the \pkgopt{smaller} package option and +%redefine \ics{acronymfont} to use the required font. For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries} +%\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}} +%\end{verbatim} +%Where \cs{acronymfont} is available, +%\DescribeMacro{\firstacronymfont}\cs{firstacronymfont} is also +%available. By default, this simply uses \cs{acronymfont}, but it +%can be redefined to change the way the acronym is displayed on +%first use. % %\begin{table}[htbp] %\caption{Package options governing \cs{newacronym} and how the @@ -1733,7 +1879,7 @@ %\begin{description} %\item[\pkgopt{description},\pkgopt{footnote}]\mbox{}\par When these two package options are used together, the first use displays %the entry as:\\[10pt] -%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long} +%\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long} %\\[10pt] %while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] %\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] @@ -1747,7 +1893,7 @@ %\ipkgopt[description]{sanitize}\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}|, so %remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. % -%\item[dua]\mbox{}\par The \pkgopt{dua} package option always displays the expanded +%\item[\pkgopt{dua}]\mbox{}\par The \pkgopt{dua} package option always displays the expanded %form and so may not be used with \pkgopt{footnote}, \pkgopt{smaller} or %\pkgopt{smallcaps}. Both first use and subsequent use displays the %entry in the form:\\[10pt] @@ -1758,7 +1904,7 @@ %\gloskey{description} key is set to the long form. % %\item[\pkgopt{description}]\mbox{}\par This package option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] %while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] %\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] %Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} @@ -1767,7 +1913,7 @@ %remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms. % %\item[\pkgopt{footnote}]\mbox{}\par This package option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long}\\[10pt] +%\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\cs{footnote}\marg{long}\\[10pt] %while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] %\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert} % @@ -1778,7 +1924,7 @@ % %\item[\pkgopt{smallcaps}]\mbox{}\par If neither the \pkgopt{footnote} nor \pkgopt{description} options %have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] %while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] %\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] %where \cs{acronymfont} is set to \verb|\textsc{#1}|, so \meta{abbrv} @@ -1791,11 +1937,14 @@ % %\item[\pkgopt{smaller}]\mbox{}\par If neither the \pkgopt{footnote} nor \pkgopt{description} options %have been set, this option displays the entry on first use as:\\[10pt] -%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] +%\meta{long}\meta{insert} (\cs{firstacronymfont}\marg{abbrv})\\[10pt] %while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] %\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] %where \cs{acronymfont} is set to \verb|{\smaller #1}|. % +%Remember to load a package that defines \ics{smaller} (such as +%\isty{relsize}) if you want to use this option. +% %Note also that if this package option is used, the \sty{glossaries} %package additionally implements the option %\ipkgopt[symbol]{sanitize}\verb|sanitize={symbol=false}|, so @@ -1806,7 +1955,6 @@ %then on first use the entry is displayed as:\\[10pt] %\meta{long} (\meta{abbrv})\meta{insert}\\[10pt] %while subsequent use displays the entry as:\\[10pt] -%\cs{acronymfont}\marg{abbrv}\meta{insert}\\[10pt] %\meta{abbrv}\meta{insert} %\end{description} % @@ -1927,7 +2075,22 @@ % %\item[listhypergroup] The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style is like %\glostyle{listgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary -%groups. +%groups. The start of the glossary has a navigation panel to +%each group that is present in the glossary. This requires an +%additional run through \LaTeX\ to ensure the group information +%is up-to-date. In the navigation panel, each group is separated +%by \DescribeMacro{\glshypernavsep}\cs{glshypernavsep} which +%defaults to a vertical bar with a space on either side. For example, +%to simply have a space separating each group, do: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space} +%\end{verbatim} +% +%Note that the hyper-navigation panel is now (as from version 1.14) +%set inside the optional argument to \cs{item} instead of after it +%to prevent a spurious space at the start. This can be changed +%by redefining \ics{glossaryheader}, but note that this needs to +%be done \emph{after} the glossary style has been set. % %\item[altlist] The \glostyle{altlist} style is like \glostyle{list} %but the description is placed on the following line. @@ -1937,7 +2100,8 @@ % %\item[altlisthypergroup] The \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} style is like %\glostyle{altlistgroup} but has a set of links to the glossary -%groups. +%groups. The navigation panel is the same as that for +%\glostyle{listhypergroup}, described above. % %\item[listdotted] This style uses the \envname{description} %environment. Each entry starts with \verb|\item[]|, followed by the @@ -2048,6 +2212,28 @@ %argument to \ics{printglossary} or using the command:\\[10pt] %\DescribeMacro{\glossarystyle}\cs{glossarystyle}\marg{style-name}\\[10pt] % +%Note that if you use the \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key in the +%optional argument to \ics{printglossary}, it will override any +%previous style settings for the given glossary, so if, for example, +%you do: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} +%\printglossary[style=long] +%\end{verbatim} +%The new definition of \ics{glsgroupskip} will not have an affect +%for this glossary, as \cs{glsgroupskip} is redefined by +%\verb|style=long|. Likewise, \ics{glossarystyle} will also +%override any previous style definitions, so, again: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{} +%\glossarystyle{long} +%\end{verbatim} +%will reset \cs{glsgroupskip} back to its default definition for the +%named glossary style (\dq{long} in this case). If you want to +%modify the styles, either use \ics{newglossarystyle} (described +%in the next section) or make the modifications after +%\ics{glossarystyle}. +% % \changes{1.03}{2007 July 4}{'glspostdescription added} %All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the %\glostyle{listdotted} style use the command @@ -2231,7 +2417,7 @@ %\cs{makefirstuc}\marg{stuff}\\[10pt] %which makes the first object of %\meta{stuff} uppercase unless \meta{stuff} starts with a control -%sequence followed by a group, in which case the first +%sequence followed by a non-empty group, in which case the first %object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples: %\begin{itemize} %\item \verb|\makefirstuc{abc}| produces Abc @@ -2247,9 +2433,13 @@ %\item \verb|\makefirstuc{{\ae}bc}| produces {\AE}bc %\end{itemize} % -%Note however that \verb|\makefirstuc{\ae{}bc}| produces \ae Bc since -%the empty group following \cs{ae} is considered to be the argument -%of \cs{ae} which is in fact not the case. +%\begin{important} +%In version 1.02 of \sty{mfirstuc}, a bug fix resulted in a change +%in output if the first object is a control sequence followed by +%an empty group. Prior to version 1.02, \verb|\makefirstuc{\ae{}bc}| +%produced \ae Bc. However as from version 1.02, it now produces +%\AE bc. +%\end{important} % %Note also that %\begin{verbatim} @@ -2273,6 +2463,17 @@ %\end{verbatim} %produces: Abc. % +%If you want to use an alternative command to convert to uppercase, +%for example \cs{MakeTextUppercase}\footnote{defined in the +%\sty{textcase} package}, you can redefine the internal +%command \cs{@gls@makefirstuc}. For example: +%\begin{verbatim} +%\renewcommand{\@gls@makefirstuc}[1]{\MakeTextUppercase #1} +%\end{verbatim} +%(Remember that command names that contain the @ character must +%either be placed in packages or be placed between \cs{makeatletter} +%\cs{makeatother}.) +% % % \StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex} % @@ -2290,7 +2491,7 @@ % This package requires \LaTeXe. % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2008/05/10 v1.13 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2008/06/17 v1.14 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} % Required packages: % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2307,7 +2508,8 @@ % Need to use \cs{new@ifnextchar} instead of \cs{@ifnextchar} in % commands that have a final optional argument (such as \ics{gls}) % so require \isty{amsgen}. -% Thanks to Morten~H{\o}gholm for suggesting this. +% Thanks to Morten~H{\o}gholm for suggesting this. (This has +% replaced using the \sty{xspace} package.) % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{amsgen} % \end{macrocode} @@ -2360,6 +2562,13 @@ subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% \newcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\glsautoprefix} +% Prefix to add before label if automatically generated: +%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} % \begin{macrocode} \define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{% false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% @@ -2371,7 +2580,7 @@ false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% \or \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% - \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\@glo@type}}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\glsautoprefix\@glo@type}}% \fi} % \end{macrocode} % @@ -5900,8 +6109,8 @@ to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your \def\glossarytitle{\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @title\endcsname}% \def\glossarytoctitle{\glossarytitle}% \def\@glossarystyle{}% -\setkeys{printgloss}{#1}% \bgroup +\setkeys{printgloss}{#1}% \@glossarystyle \makeatletter \@input@{\jobname.\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @in\endcsname}% @@ -5951,6 +6160,34 @@ to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your style `#1' undefined}{}}{% \def\@glossarystyle{\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname}}} % \end{macrocode} +% \changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{added numberedsection key to 'printglossary} +% The \gloskey[printglossary]{numberedsection} key determines if this +% glossary should be in a numbered section. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@choicekey{printgloss}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{% +false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% +\ifcase\nr\relax + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\glsautoprefix\@glo@type}}% +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{added nonumberlist key to 'printglossary} +% The \gloskey[printglossary]{nonumberlist} key determines if this +% glossary should have a number list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey{printgloss}[gls]{nonumberlist}[true]{% +\ifglsnonumberlist + \def\glossaryentrynumbers##1{}% +\else + \def\glossaryentrynumbers##1{##1}% +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} % %\DescribeEnv{theglossary} % If the \envname{theglossary} environment has @@ -6504,6 +6741,13 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \newcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{#1} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\firstacronymfont} +%This is only used with the additional acronym styles: +%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\acronymfont{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} % \begin{macrocode} \ifglsacrdescription % \end{macrocode} @@ -6581,7 +6825,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % and 'glslink} % \begin{macrocode} \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% - \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% + \firstacronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% \noexpand\protect\noexpand\glslink [\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#3}}}% \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% @@ -6624,8 +6868,6 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% name={\acronymfont#4},% sort={#4}, - first={#4},% - firstplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% text={#4},% plural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% symbol={#3},% @@ -6691,6 +6933,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{#1#4} \else % \end{macrocode} +% (dua is not set.) % Store long form in \gloskey{first} key % and short form in \gloskey{text} and \gloskey{symbol} key. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -6702,8 +6945,8 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% firstplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% text={#3},% plural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% - symbol={#3},% - symbolplural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% + symbol={\@glo@text},% + symbolplural={\@glo@plural},% #1}} % \end{macrocode} % Set up the commands to make a note of the keys to store the long @@ -6758,7 +7001,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % \end{macrocode} % Set display. % \begin{macrocode} - \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\firstacronymfont{#3})} \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} % \end{macrocode} % Redefine \ics{acronymfont} if small caps required. The plural suffix @@ -6811,7 +7054,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % 'glslink} % \begin{macrocode} \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% - \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% + \firstacronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% \noexpand\protect\noexpand\glslink [\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#2}}}% \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% @@ -6893,12 +7136,12 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% name={\acronymfont{#3}},% sort={#3},% - text={#3},% - plural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% + text={\@glo@symbol},% + plural={\@glo@symbolplural},% first={#4},% firstplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% - description={#4},% - descriptionplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% + description={\@glo@first},% + descriptionplural={\@glo@firstplural},% symbol={#3},% symbolplural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% #1}} @@ -6913,7 +7156,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % \end{macrocode} % Change the display since \gloskey{first} only contains long form. % \begin{macrocode} - \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\firstacronymfont{#3})} \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} % \end{macrocode} % Redefine \ics{acronymfont} if small caps required. The plural suffix @@ -6989,10 +7232,9 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% name={#3},% - description={#4},% - descriptionplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% text={#4},% plural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% + description={#4},% symbol={#3},% symbolplural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% #1}} @@ -7189,14 +7431,15 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %\label{sec:code:mfirstuc} % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{mfirstuc}[2008/05/13 v1.01 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{mfirstuc}[2008/06/18 v1.02 (NLCT)] % \end{macrocode} %\begin{macro}{\makefirstuc} % Syntax:\\ % \cs{makefirstuc}\marg{text}\\ % Makes the first letter uppercase, but will % skip initial control sequences if they are followed by a group -% and make the first thing in the group uppercase. +% and make the first thing in the group uppercase, unless the group +% is empty. % Thus \verb|\makefirstuc{abc}| will produce: Abc, % \verb|\makefirstuc{\ae bc}| will produce: \AE bc, but % \verb|\makefirstuc{\emph{abc}}| will produce \emph{Abc}. @@ -7213,17 +7456,27 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \if@glscs \@gls@getbody #1{}\@nil \ifx\@gls@rest\@empty - \MakeUppercase #1% + \@gls@makefirstuc{#1}% \else - \@gls@body{\expandafter\@gls@makefirstuc\@gls@rest}% + \expandafter\@gls@split\@gls@rest\@nil + \ifx\@gls@first\@empty + \@gls@makefirstuc{#1}% + \else + \@gls@body{\expandafter\@gls@makefirstuc\@gls@first}\@gls@rest% + \fi \fi \else - \MakeUppercase #1% + \@gls@makefirstuc{#1}% \fi \fi } % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} +% Put first argument in \cs{@gls@first} and second argument in +% \cs{@gls@rest}: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gls@split#1#2\@nil{\def\@gls@first{#1}\def\@gls@rest{#2}} +% \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} \def\@gls@checkcs#1 #2#3\relax{% \def\@gls@argi{#1}\def\@gls@argii{#2}% @@ -7256,6 +7509,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{#1}} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} +%\section{Glossary Styles} %\iffalse % \begin{macrocode} %</mfirstuc.sty> @@ -7266,7 +7520,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossary-hypernav.sty> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -% \subsubsection{Glossary hyper-navigation definitions (glossary-hypernav package)} +% \subsection{Glossary hyper-navigation definitions (glossary-hypernav package)} % Package Definition: % \begin{macrocode} \ProvidesPackage{glossary-hypernav}[2007/07/04 v1.01 (NLCT)] @@ -7285,11 +7539,12 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % whose label is given by \meta{label} for the glossary given % by \meta{type}. %\begin{macro}{\glsnavhyperlink} +%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{changed 'edef to 'protected@edef} % \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{hyperlink}{% \newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][]{#3}}{% \newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][\@glo@type]{% -\edef\gls@grplabel{#2}\edef\@gls@grptitle{#3}% +\edef\gls@grplabel{#2}\protected@edef\@gls@grptitle{#3}% \hyperlink{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} @@ -7299,14 +7554,39 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % whose label is given by \meta{label} in the glossary given % by \meta{type}. %\begin{macro}{\glsnavhypertarget} +%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{added write to aux file} % \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{hypertarget}{% -\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][]{#3}}{% \newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][\@glo@type]{% +\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@gls@hypergroup{#1}{#2}}% +#3}}{% +\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][\@glo@type]{% +\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@gls@hypergroup{#1}{#2}}% \hypertarget{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % +%\begin{macro}{\@gls@hypergroup} +% This adds to (or creates) the command \cs{@gls@hypergrouplist@}\meta{glossary type} +% which lists all groups for a given glossary, so that +% the navigation bar only contains those groups that are present. +% However it requires at least 2 runs to ensure the information is +% up-to-date. +%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{new} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@gls@hypergroup}[2]{% +\@ifundefined{@gls@hypergrouplist@#1}{% + \expandafter\xdef\csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname{#2}% +}{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\@gls@tmp + \csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname + \expandafter\xdef\csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname{% + \@gls@tmp,#2}% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +% % The \cs{glsnavigation} command displays a simple glossary % group navigation. % The symbol and number elements are defined separately, @@ -7316,42 +7596,34 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % terms, in which case you will get an undefined hyperlink warning. % Now for the whole navigation bit: %\begin{macro}{\glsnavigation} +% \changes{1.14}{2008 June 2008}{changed to only use labels for +% groups that are present} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\glsnavigation}{% -\glssymbolnav -\glsnavhyperlink{A}{\glsgetgrouptitle{A}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{B}{\glsgetgrouptitle{B}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{C}{\glsgetgrouptitle{C}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{D}{\glsgetgrouptitle{D}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{E}{\glsgetgrouptitle{E}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{F}{\glsgetgrouptitle{F}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{G}{\glsgetgrouptitle{G}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{H}{\glsgetgrouptitle{H}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{I}{\glsgetgrouptitle{I}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{J}{\glsgetgrouptitle{J}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{K}{\glsgetgrouptitle{K}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{L}{\glsgetgrouptitle{L}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{M}{\glsgetgrouptitle{M}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{N}{\glsgetgrouptitle{N}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{O}{\glsgetgrouptitle{O}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{P}{\glsgetgrouptitle{P}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{Q}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Q}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{R}{\glsgetgrouptitle{R}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{S}{\glsgetgrouptitle{S}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{T}{\glsgetgrouptitle{T}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{U}{\glsgetgrouptitle{U}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{V}{\glsgetgrouptitle{V}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{W}{\glsgetgrouptitle{W}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{X}{\glsgetgrouptitle{X}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{Y}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Y}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{Z}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Z}}} +\def\@gls@between{}% +\@ifundefined{@gls@hypergrouplist@\@glo@type}{% + \def\@gls@list{}% +}{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\@gls@list + \csname @gls@hypergrouplist@\@glo@type\endcsname +}% +\@for\@gls@tmp:=\@gls@list\do{% + \@gls@between + \glsnavhyperlink{\@gls@tmp}{\glsgetgrouptitle{\@gls@tmp}}% + \let\@gls@between\glshypernavsep% +}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +%\end{macro} +%\begin{macro}{\glshypernavsep} +% Separator for the hyper navigation bar. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space\textbar\space} % \end{macrocode} %\end{macro} % The \cs{glssymbolnav} produces a simple navigation set of -% links for just the symbol and number groups. This is used at -% the start of \cs{glsnavigation}. If your glossary doesn't -% contain any symbol or navigation groups, you can redefine this -% command to do nothing. +% links for just the symbol and number groups. This used to be used at +% the start of \cs{glsnavigation}. This command is no longer needed. %\begin{macro}{\glssymbolnav} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\glssymbolnav}{% @@ -7370,7 +7642,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossary-list.sty> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -% \subsubsection{List Style (glossary-list package)} +% \subsection{List Style (glossary-list package)} % The \isty{glossary-list} package defines glossary styles % that use the \envname{description} environment. Note that since % the entry name is placed in the optional argument to the @@ -7409,7 +7681,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \newglossarystyle{listhypergroup}{% \glossarystyle{list}% \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{% -\item[]\glsnavigation}% +\item[\glsnavigation]}% \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}} % \end{macrocode} @@ -7437,7 +7709,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \newglossarystyle{altlisthypergroup}{% \glossarystyle{altlist}% \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{% -\item[]\glsnavigation}% +\item[\glsnavigation]}% \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}} % \end{macrocode} @@ -7470,7 +7742,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossary-long.sty> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -% \subsubsection{Glossary Styles using longtable (the glossary-long +% \subsection{Glossary Styles using longtable (the glossary-long % package)} % The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-long} package % used the \envname{longtable} environment in the glossary. @@ -7637,7 +7909,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossary-super.sty> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -% \subsubsection{Glossary Styles using supertabular environment (glossary-super package)} +% \subsection{Glossary Styles using supertabular environment (glossary-super package)} % The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-super} package % use the \envname{supertabular} environment. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -7807,10 +8079,10 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-babel.sty> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsection{Multi-Lingual Support} +%\section{Multi-Lingual Support} % Many thanks to everyone who contributed to the translations both % via email and on comp.text.tex. -%\subsubsection{Babel Captions} +%\subsection{Babel Captions} % Define \isty{babel} captions if multi-lingual % support is required, but the \isty{translator} package is not loaded. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -7971,7 +8243,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{Danish Dictionary} +%\subsection{Danish Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -7998,7 +8270,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{Dutch Dictionary} +%\subsection{Dutch Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8025,7 +8297,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-English.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{English Dictionary} +%\subsection{English Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8052,7 +8324,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-French.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{French Dictionary} +%\subsection{French Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8079,7 +8351,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-German.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{German Dictionary} +%\subsection{German Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8107,7 +8379,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{Irish Dictionary} +%\subsection{Irish Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8134,7 +8406,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-Italian.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{Italian Dictionary} +%\subsection{Italian Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8161,7 +8433,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-Magyar.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{Magyar Dictionary} +%\subsection{Magyar Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8188,7 +8460,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-Polish.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{Polish Dictionary} +%\subsection{Polish Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8215,7 +8487,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% %<*glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict> % \end{macrocode} %\fi -%\subsubsection{Spanish Dictionary} +%\subsection{Spanish Dictionary} % This is a dictonary file provided for use with the \isty{translator} % package. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -8249,7 +8521,9 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% % desired, and add the relevant package options to % both the class file and the glossaries package. % Change the sample glossary entry and acronym if - % required. + % required. If the problem occurs with an additional + % glossary, add in the relevant \newglossary command + % and a sample entry. % % Only add extra packages or commands if they % contribute to whatever problem you are trying to @@ -8268,17 +8542,23 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \listfiles %\usepackage{glossaries} % acronym will go in main glossary -\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} % make a separate list of acronyms + \usepackage[acronym]{glossaries} % make a separate list of acronyms \makeglossaries \newglossaryentry{sample}{name={sample}, description={a sample entry}} -\newacronym{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} +% This contrived acronym has non-standard plural forms. +% These are specified in the optional argument. +\newacronym[\glsshortpluralkey=cas,\glslongpluralkey=contrived +acronyms]{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym} \begin{document} -A \gls{sample} entry and \gls{aca}. +A \gls{sample} entry and \gls{aca}. Second use: \gls{aca}. + +Plurals: \glspl{sample}. Reset acronym\glsreset{aca}. +First use: \glspl{aca}. Second use: \glspl{aca}. \printglossaries \end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins index 2c36cc2ea3c..7996164767c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% glossaries.ins generated using makedtx version 0.94b 2008/5/13 11:33 +% glossaries.ins generated using makedtx version 0.94b 2008/6/18 16:44 \input docstrip \preamble @@ -58,32 +58,19 @@ \usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Polish.dict,package}} \file{glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble \usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries-dictionary-Spanish.dict,package}} -\file{minimalgls.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{minimalgls.tex,package}} -\file{sample.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sample.tex,package}} -\file{sample4col.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sample4col.tex,package}} -\file{sampleAcr.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleAcr.tex,package}} -\file{sampleAcrDesc.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleAcrDesc.tex,package}} -\file{sampleDB.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleDB.tex,package}} -\file{sampleDesc.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleDesc.tex,package}} -\file{sampleEq.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleEq.tex,package}} -\file{sampleEqPg.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleEqPg.tex,package}} -\file{sampleNtn.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleNtn.tex,package}} -\file{sampleSec.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleSec.tex,package}} -\file{database1.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{database1.tex,package}} -\file{database2.tex}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{database2.tex,package}} +\file{minimalgls.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{minimalgls.tex}} +\file{sample.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sample.tex}} +\file{sample4col.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sample4col.tex}} +\file{sampleAcr.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleAcr.tex}} +\file{sampleAcrDesc.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleAcrDesc.tex}} +\file{sampleDB.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleDB.tex}} +\file{sampleDesc.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleDesc.tex}} +\file{sampleEq.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleEq.tex}} +\file{sampleEqPg.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleEqPg.tex}} +\file{sampleNtn.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleNtn.tex}} +\file{sampleSec.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{sampleSec.tex}} +\file{database1.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{database1.tex}} +\file{database2.tex}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{database2.tex}} \file{glossaries.perl}{\nopreamble\nopostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries.perl}} } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/glossaries.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/glossaries.sty index 9eb6e8071f1..c30716a7552 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/glossaries.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/glossaries.sty @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2008/05/10 v1.13 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2008/06/17 v1.14 (NLCT)] \RequirePackage{ifthen} \RequirePackage{xkeyval}[2006/11/18] \RequirePackage{mfirstuc} @@ -55,6 +55,7 @@ subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{% \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{#1}} \newcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*} \newcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{} +\newcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{} \define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{% false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% \ifcase\nr\relax @@ -65,7 +66,7 @@ false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% \or \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% - \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\@glo@type}}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\glsautoprefix\@glo@type}}% \fi} \newcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{list} \define@key{glossaries.sty}{style}{% @@ -1263,8 +1264,8 @@ to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your \def\glossarytitle{\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @title\endcsname}% \def\glossarytoctitle{\glossarytitle}% \def\@glossarystyle{}% -\setkeys{printgloss}{#1}% \bgroup +\setkeys{printgloss}{#1}% \@glossarystyle \makeatletter \@input@{\jobname.\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @in\endcsname}% @@ -1279,6 +1280,24 @@ to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your \@ifundefined{@glsstyle@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary style `#1' undefined}{}}{% \def\@glossarystyle{\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname}}} +\define@choicekey{printgloss}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{% +false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{% +\ifcase\nr\relax + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}% +\or + \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}% + \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\glsautoprefix\@glo@type}}% +\fi} +\define@boolkey{printgloss}[gls]{nonumberlist}[true]{% +\ifglsnonumberlist + \def\glossaryentrynumbers##1{}% +\else + \def\glossaryentrynumbers##1{##1}% +\fi} \@ifundefined{theglossary}{% \newenvironment{theglossary}{}{}}{% \PackageWarning{glossaries}{overriding `theglossary' environment}% @@ -1424,6 +1443,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRfullpl{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRfullpl{#1}{#2}[]}} \def\@ACRfullpl#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[#3]} \newcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{#1} +\newcommand{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\acronymfont{#1}} \ifglsacrdescription \ifglsacrfootnote \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% @@ -1464,7 +1484,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \def\@ACRfullpl#1#2[#3]{\@GLSsymbolplural@{#1}{#2}[#3] (\acronymfont{\@GLSplural@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% - \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% + \firstacronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% \noexpand\protect\noexpand\glslink [\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#3}}}% \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% @@ -1496,8 +1516,6 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% name={\acronymfont#4},% sort={#4}, - first={#4},% - firstplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% text={#4},% plural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% symbol={#3},% @@ -1545,8 +1563,8 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% firstplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% text={#3},% plural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% - symbol={#3},% - symbolplural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% + symbol={\@glo@text},% + symbolplural={\@glo@plural},% #1}} \def\glsshortkey{text}% \def\glsshortpluralkey{plural}% @@ -1576,7 +1594,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% (\acronymfont{\@glssymbolplural@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} \def\@ACRfullpl#1#2[#3]{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[#3] (\acronymfont{\@GLSsymbolplural@{#1}{#2}[#3]})} - \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\firstacronymfont{#3})} \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} \ifglsacrsmallcaps \renewcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} @@ -1605,7 +1623,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \def\glslongkey{description}% \def\glslongpluralkey{descriptionplural}% \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{% - \acronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% + \firstacronymfont{#1}#4\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{% \noexpand\protect\noexpand\glslink [\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{#2}}}% \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4}% @@ -1652,12 +1670,12 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% name={\acronymfont{#3}},% sort={#3},% - text={#3},% - plural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% + text={\@glo@symbol},% + plural={\@glo@symbolplural},% first={#4},% firstplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% - description={#4},% - descriptionplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% + description={\@glo@first},% + descriptionplural={\@glo@firstplural},% symbol={#3},% symbolplural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% #1}} @@ -1665,7 +1683,7 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \def\glsshortpluralkey{symbolplural}% \def\glslongkey{first}% \def\glslongpluralkey{firstplural}% - \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\acronymfont{#3})} + \defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{#1#4 (\firstacronymfont{#3})} \defglsdisplay[\acronymtype]{\acronymfont{#1}#4} \ifglsacrsmallcaps \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{#1}} @@ -1712,10 +1730,9 @@ firstplural={\@glo@descplural\space (\@glo@plural)},% \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{% \newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,% name={#3},% - description={#4},% - descriptionplural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% text={#4},% plural={#4\acrpluralsuffix},% + description={#4},% symbol={#3},% symbolplural={#3\acrpluralsuffix},% #1}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/mfirstuc.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/mfirstuc.sty index fee68259460..10832f723f1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/mfirstuc.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/base/mfirstuc.sty @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{mfirstuc}[2008/05/13 v1.01 (NLCT)] +\ProvidesPackage{mfirstuc}[2008/06/18 v1.02 (NLCT)] \newif\if@glscs \def\makefirstuc#1{% \def\gls@argi{#1}% @@ -51,15 +51,21 @@ \if@glscs \@gls@getbody #1{}\@nil \ifx\@gls@rest\@empty - \MakeUppercase #1% + \@gls@makefirstuc{#1}% \else - \@gls@body{\expandafter\@gls@makefirstuc\@gls@rest}% + \expandafter\@gls@split\@gls@rest\@nil + \ifx\@gls@first\@empty + \@gls@makefirstuc{#1}% + \else + \@gls@body{\expandafter\@gls@makefirstuc\@gls@first}\@gls@rest% + \fi \fi \else - \MakeUppercase #1% + \@gls@makefirstuc{#1}% \fi \fi } +\def\@gls@split#1#2\@nil{\def\@gls@first{#1}\def\@gls@rest{#2}} \def\@gls@checkcs#1 #2#3\relax{% \def\@gls@argi{#1}\def\@gls@argii{#2}% \ifx\@gls@argi\@gls@argii diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-hypernav.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-hypernav.sty index b79b1e8a822..e8d3a4ee331 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-hypernav.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-hypernav.sty @@ -42,40 +42,40 @@ \@ifundefined{hyperlink}{% \newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][]{#3}}{% \newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][\@glo@type]{% -\edef\gls@grplabel{#2}\edef\@gls@grptitle{#3}% +\edef\gls@grplabel{#2}\protected@edef\@gls@grptitle{#3}% \hyperlink{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}} \@ifundefined{hypertarget}{% -\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][]{#3}}{% \newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][\@glo@type]{% +\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@gls@hypergroup{#1}{#2}}% +#3}}{% +\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][\@glo@type]{% +\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@gls@hypergroup{#1}{#2}}% \hypertarget{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}} +\newcommand*{\@gls@hypergroup}[2]{% +\@ifundefined{@gls@hypergrouplist@#1}{% + \expandafter\xdef\csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname{#2}% +}{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\@gls@tmp + \csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname + \expandafter\xdef\csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname{% + \@gls@tmp,#2}% +}% +} \newcommand*{\glsnavigation}{% -\glssymbolnav -\glsnavhyperlink{A}{\glsgetgrouptitle{A}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{B}{\glsgetgrouptitle{B}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{C}{\glsgetgrouptitle{C}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{D}{\glsgetgrouptitle{D}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{E}{\glsgetgrouptitle{E}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{F}{\glsgetgrouptitle{F}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{G}{\glsgetgrouptitle{G}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{H}{\glsgetgrouptitle{H}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{I}{\glsgetgrouptitle{I}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{J}{\glsgetgrouptitle{J}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{K}{\glsgetgrouptitle{K}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{L}{\glsgetgrouptitle{L}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{M}{\glsgetgrouptitle{M}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{N}{\glsgetgrouptitle{N}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{O}{\glsgetgrouptitle{O}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{P}{\glsgetgrouptitle{P}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{Q}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Q}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{R}{\glsgetgrouptitle{R}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{S}{\glsgetgrouptitle{S}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{T}{\glsgetgrouptitle{T}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{U}{\glsgetgrouptitle{U}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{V}{\glsgetgrouptitle{V}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{W}{\glsgetgrouptitle{W}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{X}{\glsgetgrouptitle{X}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{Y}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Y}} \textbar\ -\glsnavhyperlink{Z}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Z}}} +\def\@gls@between{}% +\@ifundefined{@gls@hypergrouplist@\@glo@type}{% + \def\@gls@list{}% +}{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\@gls@list + \csname @gls@hypergrouplist@\@glo@type\endcsname +}% +\@for\@gls@tmp:=\@gls@list\do{% + \@gls@between + \glsnavhyperlink{\@gls@tmp}{\glsgetgrouptitle{\@gls@tmp}}% + \let\@gls@between\glshypernavsep% +}% +} +\newcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space\textbar\space} \newcommand*{\glssymbolnav}{% \glsnavhyperlink{glssymbols}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glssymbols}} \textbar\ \glsnavhyperlink{glsnumbers}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glsnumbers}} \textbar\ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-list.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-list.sty index db784552c3e..36b24637b95 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-list.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/styles/glossary-list.sty @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ \newglossarystyle{listhypergroup}{% \glossarystyle{list}% \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{% -\item[]\glsnavigation}% +\item[\glsnavigation]}% \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}} \newglossarystyle{altlist}{% @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ \newglossarystyle{altlisthypergroup}{% \glossarystyle{altlist}% \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{% -\item[]\glsnavigation}% +\item[\glsnavigation]}% \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{% \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}} \newlength\glslistdottedwidth |